Nortel Networks Nn43001 301 Users Manual ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation And Commissioning

NN43001-301 to the manual 8f6f8d6a-530b-44dd-8d87-38c31988129f

2015-01-26

: Nortel-Networks Nortel-Networks-Nn43001-301-Users-Manual-346480 nortel-networks-nn43001-301-users-manual-346480 nortel-networks pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 306

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Nortel Communication Server 1000

ISDN Primary Rate Interface
Installation and Commissioning

NN43001-301
.

Document status: Standard
Document version: 02.03
Document date: 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
All Rights Reserved.
Sourced in Canada
LEGAL NOTICE
While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed
to in writing NORTEL PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject
to change without notice.
Nortel, the Nortel Logo, the Globemark, SL-1, Meridian 1, and Succession are trademarks of Nortel Networks.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Contents
New in this release
Other 9
Revision History

How to get help

Getting help from the Nortel web site 11
Getting help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center 11
Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code 11
Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller 12

Introduction

Subject 13
Applicable systems 13
Intended audience 14
Related information 14

ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview

Contents 15
Introduction 17
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) hardware requirements 17
ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) hardware 18
D-Channel Handler description 20
NT6D11 DCH 20
QPC757 DCH 21
NT6D80 MSDL 23
NTBK51 Downloadable D-Channel Daughterboard 25
Standard PRI cards 25
NT8D72 PRI2 25
QPC720 PRI 30
Disk drive hardware 34
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 34
NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI 57

DCH installation
Contents 79
Install the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCH 79
Set up the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCHI 80
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

4 Contents
Install the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCHI 85
Remove the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCH 86
Install the QPC757 DCH 87

NTBK51 DDCH installation and removal

Contents 91
Introduction 91
Install NTBK51 DDCH on NT5D97 dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 91
Remove NTBK51 DDCH from NT5D97 dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 92
Install NTBK51 DDCH on NT5D12 dual-port DTI/PRI 93
Remove NTBK51 DDCH from NT5D12 dual-port DTI/PRI 94

MSDL installation for all systems

Contents 95
Install the MSDL 95
Replace the MSDL 98

NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation

101

Contents 101
Introduction 101
PRI circuit pack locations 101
Cable requirements 102
Switch settings 120
Install NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI cards on Large Systems 123
Remove NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI cards from Large Systems 124
Install an additional network shelf 125

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 installation and removal

127

Contents 127
Introduction 127
NT5D97 circuit card locations 127
Port definitions 128
Case Scenarios for replacing a digital trunk NT8D72BA, QPC536E, or NTCK43
by a DDP2 card 128
NT5D97AA/AB DIP switch settings 129
NT5D97AD DIP switch settings 134
Install the NT5D97 DDP2 139
Remove the NT5D97 DDP2 140
Configure the NT5D97 DDP2 141

NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI card installation

143

Contents 143
Introduction 143
NT5D12 circuit card locations 143
Port definitions 144
Scenarios for replacement of a digital trunk card (QPC720/QPC472) by a DDP
card 144

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Contents 5
NT5D12 switch settings 145
Install the NT5D12 DDP 150
Remove the NT5D12 DDP 152
Configure the NT5D12 DDP 153

Clock Controller description and installation

155

Contents 155
Introduction 156
Description 156
Installation procedures 168

ISL installation

179

Contents 179
ISL configurations 179
DCHI switch settings 180
MSDL switch settings 181
Dedicated mode using leased line 183
Dedicated mode using dialup modem 184
ISL installation 189

Echo canceller installation

191

Contents 191
Introduction 191
Echo canceller operating parameters 191
Echo canceller initialization procedures 191
PRI to Echo canceller pin assignments 192
Electromagnetic Interference 192

1.5 Mb PRI implementation

195

Contents 195
Overview 195
Hardware requirements 195
Hardware description 196
Install PRI hardware 203

1.5 Mb DTI implementation

219

Contents 219
Overview 219
Hardware requirements 219
Hardware description 220
Install DTI hardware 220
Software enable the DTI/PRI cards 222

1.5 Mb ISL implementation
Contents 227
Overview 227
Hardware requirements 227
Basic ISL implementation 232
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

227

6 Contents

2.0 Mb DTI implementation

237

Contents 237
Overview 237
Hardware requirements 237
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card 238
Install DTI hardware 238
DTI software implementation 241

2.0 Mb PRI implementation

257

Contents 257
Overview 257
Hardware requirements 257
Hardware description 258
Install the NTAK79 PRI card 261
Install the NTBK50 PRI card 266
PRI software implementation 272

2.0 Mb ISL implementation

283

Contents 283
Overview 283
ISL hardware requirements 283
ISL hardware installation 286
ISL software implementation 288

Nonstandard cables
Contents 295
Introduction 296
NT5K40AA, NT5K41AA, NT5K86AA 296
NT8D7206, NT8D7207 296
QCAD128 297
QCAD129 298
QCAD133 298
NT8D7205 299
QCAD328 300
NT8D74 Clock Controller to InterGroup cable 301
NT8D75 Clock Controller to Clock Controller cable 301
NT8D79 PRI/DTI to Clock Controller cable 301
NT8D83 PRI/DTI to I/O cable 301
NT8D85 Network to IPE cable 302
NT8D86 Network to I/O cable 302
NT8D97AX PRI/DTI I/O to MDF cable 302
NT9J93AD PRI/DTI Echo Canceller to I/O cable 303
NTND26 PRI to MSDL cables 303
NTND27 MSDL to I/O panel cables 303
NTND98 PRI to I/O panel cables 303
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

295

Contents 7

Procedures
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure

1
2
3
4
5

Procedure 6
Procedure 7
Procedure 8
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure

9
10
11
12
13

Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure

14
15
16
17
18

Procedure 19
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

Install the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCH 85
Remove the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCH 86
Install the QPC757 DCHI 87
Remove the QPC757 DCH 90
Install the NTBK51 on the NT5D97 dual-port DTI2/PRI2
card 92
Remove the NTBK51 from the NT5D97 dual-port DTI2/PRI2
card 93
Install the NTBK51 DDCH on the NT5D12 dual-port
DTI/PRI 94
Remove the NTBK51 from the NT5D12 dual-port DTI/PRI
card 94
Install the MSDL card 95
Replace the MSDL card 98
Install the NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI on Large Systems 123
124
Install an additional network shelf on Half Group and Single
Group systems 125
Install the NT5D97 on Large Systems 139
Remove the NT5D97 from Large Systems 141
Install the NT5D12 on Large Systems 151
Remove the NT5D12 DDP 152
Install a clock controller for Half Group and Single Group
Systems. 171
Install a Clock Controller on a Single Group and Multi Group
System 173
Remove old equipment 175
Installing new equipment 176
Install ISL in dedicated mode 189
Install ISL in shared mode 189
Mounting the NTAK20 daughterboard on the NTRB21 203
Inserting the NTRB21 TMDI card 205
Removing the NTRB21 TMDI card 206
Mounting the daughterboards on the NTAK09 206
Removing the daughterboards from the NTAK09 207
Installing the NTAK09 209
Connecting the cables 209
Enabling the NTRB21 TMDI card 210
Enabling the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card 211
Implementing basic PRI 212
Enabling the NTRB21 TMDI card 222
Enabling the NTAK09 card 222
Implementing DTI 223
Installing ISL hardware 230
Implementing dedicated mode 232
Connecting the cables 240
261
Connecting the cables 264

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

8 Contents
Procedure
Procedure 41
Procedure 42
Procedure 43

266
Inspecting the NTBK50 circuit card
Installing the NTAK02 286
Setting up the D-channel 287

266

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

New in this release
There have been no updates to the document in this release

Other
Revision History
December 2007

Standard 02.03. This document has been up-issued to support
Communication Server Release 5.5.

August 2007

Standard 01.03. This document has been up-issued to support a
change request.

June 2007

Standard 01.02. This document is up-issued to remove the Nortel
Networks Confidential statement.

May 2007

Standard 01.01. This document is issued to support Communication
Server 1000 Release 5.0. This document contains information
previously contained in the following legacy document, now retired:
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
(NN43001-301). No new content has been added for Communication
Server 1000 Release 5.0. All references to Communication Server
1000 Release 4.5 are applicable to Communication Server 1000
Release 5.0.

August 2005

Standard 3.00. This document is up-issued to support
Communication Server 1000 Release 4.5.

September 2004

Standard 2.00. This document is up-issued for Communication
Server 1000 Release 4.0.

October 2003

Standard 1.00. This document is a new technical document for
Succession 3.0. It was created to support a restructuring of the
Documentation Library, which resulted in the merging of multiple
legacy technical documents. This new document consolidates
information previously contained in the following legacy documents,
now retired:
•

ISDN Primary Rate Interface: Installation (553-2901-201)

•

1.5Mb DTI/PRI: Description, Installation and Maintenance
(553-3011-310) (Content from 1.5Mb DTI/PRI: Description,
Installation and Maintenance (553-3011-310) also appears in
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Maintenance (NN43001-717).)

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

10 New in this release

•

2.0Mb DTI/PRI: Description, Installation and Maintenance
(553-3011-315) (Content from 2.0Mb DTI/PRI: Description,
Installation and Maintenance (553-3011-315) also appears in
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Maintenance (NN43001-717).)

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

How to get help
This chapter explains how to get help for Nortel products and services.

Getting help from the Nortel web site
The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel
Technical Support web site:
http://www.nortel.com/support
This site provides quick access to software, documentation, bulletins, and
tools to address issues with Nortel products. From this site, you can:
•

download software, documentation, and product bulletins

•

search the Technical Support Web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base
for answers to technical issues

•

open and manage technical support cases

Getting help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center
If you do not find the information you require on the Nortel Technical Support
web site, and you have a Nortel support contract, you can also get help over
the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center.
In North America, call 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835).
Outside North America, go to the following web site to obtain the telephone
number for your region:
http://www.nortel.com/callus

Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code
To access some Nortel Technical Solutions Centers, you can use an Express
Routing Code (ERC) to quickly route your call to a specialist in your Nortel
product or service. To locate the ERC for your product or service, go to:

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

12 How to get help

http://www.nortel.com/erc

Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller
If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor
or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor
or reseller.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Introduction
This document is a global document. Contact your system supplier or your
Nortel representative to verify that the hardware and software described
are supported in your area.

Subject
Note on legacy products and releases
This technical document contains information about systems, components,
and features that are compatible with Nortel Communication Server
1000 Release 5.5 software. For more information on legacy products
and releases, click the Technical Documentation link under Support &
Training on the Nortel home page:
www.nortel.com

Applicable systems
This document applies to the following systems:
•

Communication Server 1000E (CS 1000E) CP PII, CP PIV and CP PM

•

Communication Server 1000M Single Group (CS 1000M SG) CP PII,
CP PIV

•

Communication Server 1000M Multi Group (CS 1000M MG) CP PII,
CP PIV

•

Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis

•

Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet

•

Meridian 1 PBX 61C CP PII, CP PIV

•

Meridian 1 PBX 81C CP PII, CP PIV
Note: When upgrading software, memory upgrades may be required on
the Signaling Server, the Call Server, or both.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

14 Introduction

System migration
When particular Meridian 1 systems are upgraded to run CS 1000 software
and configured to include a Signaling Server, they become CS 1000
systems. Table 1 "Meridian 1 systems to CS 1000 systems" (page 14) lists
each Meridian 1 system that supports an upgrade path to a CS 1000 system.
Table 1
Meridian 1 systems to CS 1000 systems
This Meridian 1 system...

Maps to this CS 1000 system

Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis

CS 1000E

Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet

CS 1000E

Meridian 1 PBX 61C

CS 1000M Single Group

Meridian 1 PBX 81C

CS 1000M Multi Group

Intended audience
This document is intended for individuals responsible for installing and
configuring ISDN PRI.

Related information
This section lists information sources that relate to this document.

Technical Documents
The following technical documents are referenced in this document:
•

Features and Services Fundamentals (NN43001-106)

•

Software Input Output Administration (NN43001-611)

•

Software Input Output Reference — Maintenance (NN43001-711)

Online
To access Nortel documentation online, click the Technical Documentation
link under Support & Training on the Nortel home page:
www.nortel.com

CD-ROM
To obtain Nortel documentation on CD-ROM, contact your Nortel customer
representative.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment
overview
Contents
The section contains information on the following topics:
"Introduction" (page 17)
"Primary Rate Interface (PRI) hardware requirements" (page 17)
"ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) hardware" (page 18)
"64 Kbit/s Clear Data Hardware" (page 20)
"D-Channel Handler description" (page 20)
"NT6D11 DCH" (page 20)
"Power requirements" (page 20)
"DCH/PRI interface" (page 20)
"DCH faceplate" (page 20)
"QPC757 DCH" (page 21)
"Power requirements" (page 21)
"DCH/PRI interface" (page 21)
"QPC757 faceplate" (page 22)
"NT6D80 MSDL" (page 23)
"Power requirements" (page 23)
"MSDL/PRI interface" (page 24)
"MSDL faceplate" (page 24)
"NTBK51 Downloadable D-Channel Daughterboard" (page 25)
"Standard PRI cards" (page 25)
"NT8D72 PRI2" (page 25)
"Power requirements" (page 25)
"NT8D72 faceplate" (page 25)
"Cable requirements" (page 27)

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

16 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview

"Carrier interface" (page 27)
"Echo canceller interface" (page 28)
"QMT21 High Speed Data Module" (page 28)
"QPC720 PRI for 1.5/2.0 Mb gateway" (page 28)
"Clock operation for the NT8D72" (page 28)
"QPC720 PRI" (page 30)
"Power requirements" (page 30)
"QPC720 faceplate" (page 31)
"QPC720 Cable requirements" (page 32)
"Carrier interface" (page 32)
"Echo Canceller interface" (page 32)
"64 T-link version 2 protocol" (page 33)
"Disk drive hardware" (page 34)
"NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card" (page 34)
"External D-Channel Interface DCH or MSDL" (page 34)
"NT5D97 faceplate" (page 35)
"System capacity and performance" (page 39)
"Testability and diagnostics" (page 40)
"Cable requirements" (page 40)
"Cable diagrams" (page 47)
"Clock for the NT5D97" (page 49)
"NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI" (page 57)
"D-Channel and MSDL interface" (page 58)
"NT5D12 faceplate" (page 59)
"System capacity and performance" (page 64)
"Power requirements" (page 65)
"Testability and diagnostics" (page 65)
"NT5D12 Cable requirements" (page 65)
"Trunk Tip/Ring cables" (page 66)
"Reference clock cables" (page 68)
"MSDL/DCHI cables" (page 68)
"Cable diagrams" (page 69)
"Clock" (page 70)
"Reference clock errors" (page 71)
"Automatic clock recovery" (page 72)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Primary Rate Interface (PRI) hardware requirements

"Automatic clock switching" (page 72)
"Clock configurations" (page 72)

Introduction
This chapter describes the basic hardware needed to equip ISDN PRI on
CS 1000 and Meridian 1 systems.

Primary Rate Interface (PRI) hardware requirements
The following hardware is required to equip ISDN PRI on a Large System:
•

NT6D11(AB/AE/AF) D-Channel Interface (DCH) card (for 2.0 Mb PRI)

•

QPC757 D-channel Interface (DCH) for (1.5 Mb PRI)

•

NT6D80 Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) card

•

NTBK51 Downloadable D-Channel Daughterboard (DDCH), the NT5D97
dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card, or the NT5D12 dual-port 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card

•

NT8D72 (AB/BA) PRI2 card

•

NT5D97 dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card

•

QPC720 1.5 Mb PRI card

•

NT5D12 dual-port 1.5 DTI/PRI card

•

QPC775 or NTRB53 Clock Controller
Note: The NTRB53 Clock Controller cannot be combined with a
QPC775 or a QPC471 card in one system

Additional hardware is also required for PRI capability and applications.
Installation instructions are given in other Nortel publications, or supplied by
the manufacturer. This additional hardware includes:
•

QPC414 Network card

•

Channel Service Unit (CSU)

•

Echo canceller

•

ROM circuit card requirements:
— the QPC939A for a CS 1000M HG
— the QPC939A for CS 1000M SG
Note: CS 1000M MG ROM requirements are fulfilled by the NT6D66
Call Processor (CP) card.

•

QMT8 Asynchronous Data Module (ADM)

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

18 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview

See Figure 1 "PRI hardware (shown without downloadable PRI and DCH
cards)" (page 18) for a representation of the basic PRI system hardware.
Note: Figure 1 shows a basic configuration, not the dual-port NT5D12
DTI/PRI card, nor the associated dual-port NTBK51AA Downloadable
D-Channel daughterboard.
Figure 1
PRI hardware (shown without downloadable PRI and DCH cards)

ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) hardware
The following hardware is required for ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) capability
and applications.
Equipment required for shared mode capability:
•

NT6D11(AB/AE/AF) D-Channel (DCH) card (for 2.0 Mb PRI)

•

QPC757 D-channel (DCH) for (1.5 Mb PRI)

•

NT6D80 Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) card

•

NTBK51 Downloadable D-Channel Daughterboard (DDCH), the NT5D97
dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card, or the NT5D12 dual-port 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card

•

NT8D72 (AB/BA) PRI2 card

•

NT5D97 dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card

•

QPC720 1.5 Mb PRI card
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) hardware 19

•

NT5D12 dual-port 1.5 DTI/PRI card

•

QPC775 Clock Controller or NTRB53

Equipment required for dedicated mode using leased lines:
•

NT6D11(AB/AE/AF) D-Channel (DCH) card (for 2.0 Mb PRI)

•

QPC757 D-channel (DCH) for (1.5 Mb PRI)

•

NT6D80 Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) card

•

NTBK51 Downloadable D-Channel Daughterboard (DDCH), used as
an option to the NT6D80 MSDL

•

modem set in synchronous mode

Equipment required for dedicated mode using a dialup modem:
•

NT6D11(AB/AE/AF) D-Channel (DCH) card (for 2.0 Mb PRI)

•

QPC757 D-channel (DCH) for (1.5 Mb PRI)

•

NT6D80 Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) card

•

NTBK51 Downloadable D-Channel Daughterboard (DDCH), used as
an option to the NT6D80 MSDL

•

modem with autodial capability
Note: This configuration is the least reliable due to lockup problems
inherent in Smart Modems from power spikes and noisy lines. To
increase the reliability on this configuration, use a constant power
source when powering the modems. Also, verify that TIE lines meet data
grade specifications. Nortel takes no responsibility for ISL D-Channel
outages due to modem lockup.

•

500 set line card

•

QPC71 2W TIE, or QPC237 4W TIE E&M

Equipment required for dedicated mode using a DTI/DTI2 trunk:
•

NT6D11(AB/AE/AF) D-Channel (DCH) card (for 2.0 Mb PRI)

•

QPC757 D-channel (DCH) for (1.5 Mb PRI)

•

NT6D80 Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) card

•

NTBK51 Downloadable D-Channel Daughterboard (DDCH), used as
an option to the NT6D80 MSDL

•

NT5D97 dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card

•

QPC472 1.5 Mb DTI card or NT5D12 dual-port 1.5 DTI/PRI card

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

20 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview

•

QMT8 Asynchronous Data Module (ADM), QMT11 Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module (ASIM) or QMT21 High Speed Data Module
(HSDM)

•

Data line card

64 Kbit/s Clear Data Hardware
The QMT21 High Speed Data Module (HSDM) is required in the clear-data
pathway to support the 64Kbit/s clear-data function. One module is required
at each system end of any connection.

D-Channel Handler description
This section provides descriptions of the D-Channel (DCH) cards, the MSDL
card, and the Downloadable D-Channel Daughterboard.

NT6D11 DCH
Power requirements
The power requirements for the NT6D11AB/11AE/AF DCH are:
•

+5 volts at 3 amperes

•

+12 volts at 75 milliamperes

•

-12 volts at 75 milliamperes

DCH/PRI interface
The NT6D11AB/AE/AF DCHs connect to the PRI2 cards by means of a
special RS422 cable, the QCAD328A, which is a special RS422 cable; refer
to "QCAD328" (page 300) of the Cabling chapter for more details.

DCH faceplate
NT6D11AB/AE/AF DCHs have one Light Emitting Diode (LED), to indicate
an active or inactive state, and two external connectors:
•

Port J1 is a standard asynchronous port providing an interface for
non-PRI applications.
Note: This connection will not support an Add-on Data Module (ADM)
terminal.

•

Port J2 is the D-Channel Interface port.

Figure 2 "NT6D11 DCH faceplate layout" (page 21) shows the faceplate
layout.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

QPC757 DCH

Figure 2
NT6D11 DCH faceplate layout

QPC757 DCH
Power requirements
The power requirements for the QPC757 DCH are:
•

+5 volts at 3 amperes

•

+12 volts at 50 milliamperes

•

–12 volts at 50 milliamperes

DCH/PRI interface
The QPC757 DCH connects to the QPC720 PRI via a RS-422 cable. The
following signals are transmitted across the interface:
•

RCV DATA
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

22 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview

•

RCV CLOCK

•

XMIT CLOCK

•

XMIT READY

•

PRI READY

•

DCH READY

PRI READY and DCH READY are handshake signals.

QPC757 faceplate
The QPC757 DCH, as shown in Figure 3 "QPC757 DCH faceplate layout"
(page 23) has one LED to indicate an active or inactive state and two
external connectors as follows:
•

Port J1 is a standard asynchronous port in LD 48
Note: This connection does not support an Add-on Data Module (ADM)
terminal.

•

Port J2 is the D-Channel Interface port.
Note: A QPC757 vintage C is required if the ISL Revert to Conventional
Signaling feature is configured. The QPC757 vintage D is recommended
for combination ISL/PRI networks using NACD or Network Message
Services and ISL networks using modems.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT6D80 MSDL

Figure 3
QPC757 DCH faceplate layout

NT6D80 MSDL
The NT6D80 MSDL card can be used in conjunction with, or independent
of, the QPC757, or NT6D11AB/AE/AF DCH.

Power requirements
The NT6D80 MSDL power requirements are:
Voltage
(VAC)

Current
(Amps)

Power
(Watts)

Heat
(BTUs)

3.20

16.00

55.36

+12

0.10

1.20

4.15

-12

0.10

1.20

4.15

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

24 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview

MSDL/PRI interface
MSDL can connect to PRI trunks through RS-422 or RS-232 interfaces.
The interfaces are switch configured.

MSDL faceplate
The NT6D80 MSDL has one LED to indicate an active or inactive state and
four external connectors. Each port can be RS-422 or RS-232 connectors,
with either DCE or DTE interfaces. Refer to Figure 4 "NT6D80 MSDL
faceplate layout" (page 24).
Figure 4
NT6D80 MSDL faceplate layout

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT8D72 PRI2

NTBK51 Downloadable D-Channel Daughterboard
The NTBK51 is a two port Downloadable D-Channel Daughterboard (DDCH)
that has been introduced as an option to the NT6D80 MSDL, the NT5D97
dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card, or the NT5D12 dual-port 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card.
The NTBK51 supports all the features of the existing 4 port MSDL
(NT6D80), and eliminates the need for an external DCH card and associated
cables for MSDL applications. The NTBK51 can support a maximum of 32
(16*2) MSDL type D-Channels per system, unlike the MSDL which can
support a maximum of 64.
Note 1: Only one version, the NTBK51AA, can be used with the
NT5D97, or the NT5D12. The NTBK51BA version has only 30+30 pin
connectors (instead of 40+30 pins in the AA version). The missing 10
pins in the BA version prohibits the use of port 0 on the NT5D97, or
NT5D12 card.
Note 2: The software allocation for NTBK51AA DDCH is similar to
the MSDL. It is both physical and logical, and supports D-Channel
functionality only.
Note 3: Port 0 has to be an even loop on the DDP2, and Port 1 has to
be an odd loop. Port 2 and Port 3 should not be configured.
The connection between the dual-port cards and the DDCH daughterboard
is made using two headers: one 30 pin and one 40 pin connector.

Standard PRI cards
This section provides a description of the standard ISDN PRI cards, namely
the NT8D72 (AB/BA) PRI2 card, and the QPC720 1.5 Mb PRI card.

NT8D72 PRI2
Power requirements
The NT8D72AB and NT8D72BA PRI use power and ground connections
from the backplane. Power requirements are:
+5 volts at 4 amperes
+12 volts at 50 milliamperes
-12 volts at 50 milliamperes

NT8D72 faceplate
The NT8D72 contains five LEDs and six external connectors. Figure 5
"NT8D72 PRI faceplate layout" (page 26) shows the faceplate layout.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

26 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Figure 5
NT8D72 PRI faceplate layout

Table 2 "NT8D72 PRI External connectors" (page 26) gives information
about the external connectors located on the NT8D72 PRI2 faceplate.
Table 2
NT8D72 PRI External connectors
Faceplate Destination

Type

Description

9-pin female, D-connector

Reference Clock 0 interface

9-pin female, D-connector

Reference Clock 1 interface

36-pin connector

Loop interface

15-pin male, D-connector

External digital trunk

15-pin male, D-connector

D-Channel interface

15-pin female, D-connector

Echo Canceller/RS-232 interface

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT8D72 PRI2

Faceplate Destination

Type

Description

RCV MON

Miniature bantam jack

Monitor DSI from network

XMT MON

Miniature bantam jack

Monitor DSI from PRI

Cable requirements
Table 3 "NT8D72AB and NT8D72BA PRI: Cables and cable lengths" (page
27) lists the types of cable used and the lengths required for internal and
external NT8D72 PRI2 connections.
Note: No additional cabling is required for nB+D configurations. Multiple
PRIs and the D-Channel are associated at the PRI prompt in LD 17.
Table 3
NT8D72AB and NT8D72BA PRI: Cables and cable lengths
Cable Type

From

Maximum length
(meters)

NT8D79AA

PRI card

Clock controller (CC-0)

2.13

NT8D79AA

PRI card

Clock controller (CC-1)

2.13

QCAD328A

PRI card

DCH card

1.8

QCAD328B

PRI card

DCH card

5.5

QCAD328C

PRI card

DCH card

10.67

QCAD328D

PRI card

DCH card

15.24

NTND26AA

PRI card

MSDL

1.8

NTND26AB

PRI card

MSDL

5.5

NTND26AC

PRI card

MSDL

10.67

NTND26AD

PRI card

MSDL

15.24

NT8D85AB

PRI card Network

Network Card

15.24

RS-232

PRI card

Echo canceller

15.24

NT8D7207

PRI card

I/O panel

3.05

NT8D7205

I/O panel

crossconnect

15.24

Carrier interface
The NT8D72 PRI2 provides an interface to the 2Mb external digital
line either directly or through an office repeater, echo canceller or line
terminating unit (LTU).

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

28 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview

Echo canceller interface
Echo cancellers are required only on satellite transmission circuits. The
echo canceller detects the length of the loop, and then cancels out reflected
transmission. (Callers will not hear echoes of their own voices reflecting
back to them from the far end of the call.)
The echo canceller’s control protocol must conform with that of the Tellabs
Model 251. Both the echo canceller and the PRI circuit card act as Data
Terminal Equipment (DTE).

QMT21 High Speed Data Module
The QMT21 High Speed Data Module supports the 64K Clear Data feature.
(It allows data terminating equipment (DTE) to send and receive 64-Kb/s
clear data.) The QMT21B is required for Large System to Large System
configurations.

QPC720 PRI for 1.5/2.0 Mb gateway
Systems which are being used as a 1.5/2.0 Mb Gateway, one or more
QPC720 (1.5 Mb) Primary Rate Interface circuit cards will also be needed.
Note: Older vintages of the QPC720 PRI cannot be used for Gateway
applications. The 1.5/2.0 Mb Gateway feature requires the use of a
QPC720 circuit card with firmware updated to provide modified PAD
values.

Clock operation for the NT8D72
There are two types of clock operation—tracking mode and free-run mode.

Tracking mode
In tracking mode, the PRI loop supplies an external clock reference to a
clock controller. Two PRI loops can operate in tracking mode, with one
defined as the primary reference source for clock synchronization, the other
defined as the secondary reference source. The secondary reference acts
as a back-up to the primary reference.
As shown in Figure 6 "Clock controller primary and secondary tracking"
(page 29), a system with dual CPUs can have two clock controllers (CC-0
and CC-1). One clock controller acts as a back-up to the other. The clock
controllers should be completely locked to the reference clock.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT8D72 PRI2

Figure 6
Clock controller primary and secondary tracking

Free run (non-tracking) mode
The clock synchronization of the system can operate in free-run mode if:
•

no loop is defined as the primary or secondary clock reference,

•

the primary and secondary references are disabled, or

•

the primary and secondary references are in local alarm

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

30 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview

A reference-clock error occurs when there is a problem with the clock driver
or with the reference clock at the far end. If the clock controller detects a
reference-clock error, the reference clocks are switched.

Automatic clock recovery
A command for automatic clock recovery can be selected in LD 60 with
the command EREF.
A PRI loop is disabled when it enters a local-alarm condition. If the local
alarm is cleared, the loop is enabled automatically. When the loop is
enabled, clock tracking is restored in the following conditions:
1. If the loop is assigned as the primary reference clock but the clock
controller is tracking on the secondary reference or in free-run mode, it
is restored to tracking on primary.
2. If the loop is assigned as the secondary reference clock but the clock
controller is in free-run mode, it is restored to tracking on secondary.
If the clock check indicates the switch is in free-run mode:
1. Tracking is restored to the primary reference clock if defined.
2. If the primary reference is disabled or in local alarm, tracking is restored
to the secondary reference clock if defined.
Note: If the switch is put into free-run mode by the craftsperson, it will
resume tracking on a reference clock unless the clock-switching option
has been disabled (LD 60, command MREF), or the reference clock has
been "undefined" in the database.

Automatic clock switching
If the EREF command is selected in LD 60, tracking on the primary or
secondary reference clock is automatically switched in the following manner:
1. If software is unable to track on the assigned primary reference clock, it
switches to the secondary reference clock and sends appropriate DTC
maintenance messages.
2. If software is unable to track on the assigned secondary reference clock,
it switches to free run.

QPC720 PRI
The QPC720 PRI card is required for PRI operation in all machine types.

Power requirements
The QPC720 PRI uses power and ground from the backplane. This card
does not require an intelligent bus. Power requirements are:
•

+5 volts at 6 amperes

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

QPC720 PRI 31

•

+12 volts at 50 milliamperes

•

-12 volts at 50 milliamperes

QPC720 faceplate
QPC720 PRI contains five LEDs and six external connectors. Figure 7
"QPC720 PRI faceplate layout" (page 31) shows the QPC720 PRI faceplate
layout. Table 4 "QPC720 PRI external connectors" (page 31) gives
information about the external connectors located on the QPC720 PRI
faceplate.
Figure 7
QPC720 PRI faceplate layout

Table 4
QPC720 PRI external connectors
Faceplate destination

Type

9-pin female, D-connector
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

32 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview

Faceplate destination

Type

9-pin female, D-connector

36-pin connector

15-pin male, D-connector

15-pin female, D-connector

RCV MON

Miniature bantam jack

XMT MON

Miniature bantam jack

QPC720 Cable requirements
Table 5 "QPC720 PRI cables and cable lengths" (page 33) lists the types of
cable used and the lengths required for external QPC720 PRI connections.
Note: No additional cabling is required for nB+D configurations. Multiple
PRIs and the D-channel are associated through software in LD 17,
prompt PRI.

Carrier interface
The QPC720 PRI provides an interface to the DS-1 Channel either directly,
through an office repeater, or through an Echo Canceller.
The T1 Channel Service Units listed below are compatible with the QPC720
PRI card and the 64K Clear Data feature as well as with PRI connection
parameters such as the Superframe format, the Extended superframe
format, and the B7 and B8ZS Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) line coding.
•

Digital Link 551A

•

Digital Link 551C

•

Digital Link 551E

•

Tellabs Model 441

•

Verilink Model 551V ST

In the U.S.A., FCC Part 68 regulations require Network Channel Terminating
Equipment (for example, the NT QRY551 Channel Service Unit) installed
at of the point of connection between a system and a registered common
carrier trunk.

Echo Canceller interface
Echo Cancellers are required only with satellite transmission. The Echo
Canceller detects the length of the loop, then cancels the reflected
transmission (callers do not hear their own voices echoed).

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

QPC720 PRI 33

The QPC720 PRI provides both a T1 line interface and a control interface to
link to a signal format compatible with EIA standard RS-232-C. Both the PRI
and the Echo Canceller act as Data Terminal Equipment (DTE). The Echo
Canceller’s control protocol must conform to that of the Tellabs Model 251.

64 T-link version 2 protocol
The QPC720 card supports the 64 T-link version 2 protocol. The QPC720
together with theQMT21 High Speed Data Module supports the 64K Clear
Data feature. The QPC720 card provides a trunk that ties two switches
together. This trunk allows 64K eClear Data to pass from the system to an
outside network. The QMT21 module allows Data Terminal Equipment
(DTE) to send and receive 64K Clear Data. See Meridian Link ISDN/AP
General Guide (553-2901-100) for more information about the 64K Clear
Data feature.
Table 5
QPC720 PRI cables and cable lengths
Maximum
length (feet)

Maximum
length
(meters)

Cable type

From

QCAD130

QPC720

QPC471/QPC775 (CC-0)

2.13

QCAD130

QPC720

QPC471/QPC775 (CC-1)

2.13

QCAD328A

QPC720

QPC757 DCHI

1.8

QCAD328B

QPC720

QPC757 DCHI

5.5

QCAD328C

QPC720

QPC757 DCHI

10.67

QCAD328D

QPC720

QPC757 DCHI

15.24

QCAD124

QPC720

QPC414 Network

15.24

QCAD128

QPC720

Bulkhead I/O panel

7.62

RS-232

QPC720

Echo Canceller

15.24

NTND26AA

QPC720

NT6D80 MSDL

1.8

NTND26AB

QPC720

NT6D80 MSDL

5.5

NTND26AC

QPC720

NT6D80 MSDL

10.67

NTND26AD

QPC720

NT6D80 MSDL

15.24

NTND98

QPC720

Input/output panel

1.8

22AWG ABAM

Echo Canceller

DSX-1

655

199.64

Note: The QPC775 Clock Controller is not available in the U.S.A. There
can be no mixing of QPC775 and QPC471 in one system.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

34 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview

Disk drive hardware
The following hardware is required for Large System upgrades:
•

3.5-inch disk drive unit

•

disk drive controller for above

•

cable for above

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card
The NT5D97 is a dual-port 2.0 Mb DTI2/PRI2 card (the DDP2 firmware
functions in DTI2 or PRI2 mode, depending on DIP switch settings) that
integrates the functionality of two NT8D72BA PRI2 cards, and one QPC414
ENET card into a single CE card. The NT5D97 occupies a single slot in
the Network shelf and provides two DTI2/PRI2 network connections: an
interface to an external D-Channel Handler (the NT6D11AF) or the NT6D80
Multipurpose Serial Data Link card, and an optional plug-on NTBK51AA
Downloadable D-Channel daughterboard (DDCH) with two DCH interface
ports.
The NT5D97 DDP2 card can be mixed in the same machine with PRI2
NT8D72BA cards.
The NT5D97 DDP2 card hardware design uses a B57 ASIC E1/T1 framer.
The carrier specifications comply with the ANSI TI.403 specification. The
NT5D97 provides an interface to the 2.048 Mbps external digital line
either directly or through an office repeater, Network Channel Terminating
Equipment (NCTE), or Line Terminating Unit (LTU).

DANGER
DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
The NT5D97 DDP2 card is not designed to be connected
directly to the Public Switched Network, or other exposed plant
networks. Such a connection should only be done using an
isolating-type networking terminating device that provides voltage
surge protection, such as a Line Terminating Unit (LTU), Network
Channel Terminating Equipment (NCTE), or Network Termination
1 (NT1), as certified by your local, regional, or national safety
agency and telecommunications authority.

External D-Channel Interface DCH or MSDL
The connection between the DDP2 card and the external DCH or MSDL is
through a 26 pin female D type connector. The data signals conform to the
electrical characteristics of the EIA standard RS-422.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card

Two control signals are used to communicate the D-channel link status
to the DCH or MSDL. These are:
•

Receiver Ready (RR), originating at the DDP2 card, to indicate to the
DCH or MSDL that the D-channel link is operational.

•

Transmitter Ready (TR), originating at the DCH or MSDL, to indicate to
the DDP2 card that the DCH are ready to use the D-channel link.

Table 6 "DCH/MSDL Receiver Ready control signals" (page 35) indicates
how the RR control signal operates with regard to the DDP2 status.
Table 6
DCH/MSDL Receiver Ready control signals
RR State

Condition

D-Channel data rate selected at 64 Kbps
and
PRI2 loop is enabled
and
PRI2 link is not in OOS or Local Alarm mode state
and
PRI2 link is not transmitting a Remote Alarm pattern
and
PRI2 link is not receiving a Remote Alarm Indication from
a remote facility

OFF

All other conditions

NT5D97 faceplate
Figure 8 "NT5D97 faceplate" (page 36) illustrates the faceplate layout for
the NT5D97 DDP card. The faceplate contains an enable/disable switch;
a DDCH status LED; 6 x 2 trunk port status LEDs; and six external
connectors. Table 7 "External connectors and LEDs" (page 36) shows the
name of each connector, its designation with respect to the faceplate and
the name and description of the card it is connected to. Also shown are the
names of the LEDs.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

36 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Figure 8
NT5D97 faceplate

Table 7
External connectors and LEDs
Function

Faceplate
Designator

Type

Description

Switch

ENB/DIS

Plastic, ESD protected

Card Enable/disable
switch

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card

Function

Faceplate
Designator

Type

Description

Connectors

Unit 0 Clock 0

RJ11 Connector

Connects reference
clock 0 to Clock
Controller card 0

Unit 0 Clock 1

RJ11 Connector

Connects reference
clock 0 to Clock
Controller card 1

Unit 1 Clock 0

RJ11 Connector

Connects reference
clock 1 to Clock
Controller card 0

Unit 1 Clock 1

RJ11 Connector

Connects reference
clock 1 to Clock
Controller card 1

J5 TRK

9 Pin
Female D Connector

Two external E1 Trunk
0 and Trunk 1

J6 DCH

26 Pin
Female D Connector

Connects to external
DCH or MSDL

ENET

2 Red LEDs

ENET 0 or ENET 1 is
disabled

DIS

2 Red LEDs

Trunk 0 or Trunk 1 is
disabled

OOS

2 Yellow LEDs

Trunk is out of service

NEA

2 Yellow LEDs

Local (Near End) Alarm

FEA

2 Yellow LEDs

Far End Alarm

LBK

2 Yellow LEDs

Loop Back test being
performed on Trunk 0
or Trunk 1

DCH

Bicolor Red/Green LED NTBK51AA status

LEDs

The following is a brief description of each element on the faceplate.

Enable/Disable Switch
This switch is used to disable the card prior to insertion or removal from
the network shelf. While this switch is in disable position, the card will not
respond to the system CPU.

ENET LEDs
Two red LEDs indicate if the "ENET0" and "ENET1" portions of the card are
disabled. These LEDs are lit in the following cases:
•

When the enable/disable switch is in disabled state (lit by hardware).

•

After power-up, before the card is enabled.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

38 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview

•

When the ENET port on the card is disabled by software.

Trunk Disable (DIS) LEDs
Two red LEDs indicate if the "trunk port 0" or "trunk port 1" portions of the
card are disabled. These LEDs are lit in the following cases:
•

upon reception of the "disable loop" message from the software

•

after power-up

OOS LEDs
Two yellow LEDs indicate if the "trunk port 0" and "trunk port 1" portions of
the card are out-of-service.

NEA LEDs
Two yellow LEDs indicate if the near end detects absence of incoming signal
or loss of synchronization in "trunk port 0" or "trunk port 1" respectively.
The Near End Alarm causes a Far End Alarm signal to be transmitted to
the far end.

FEA LEDs
Two yellow LEDs indicate if a Far End Alarm has been reported by the far
end (usually in response to a Near End Alarm condition at the far end)
on "trunk port 0" or "trunk port 1".

LBK LEDs
Two yellow LEDs indicate if a remote loopback test is being performed on
trunk port 0 or trunk port 1. The loopback indication is active when the
digital trunk is in remote loopback mode. Normal call processing is inhibited
during the remote loopback test.

DCH LED
When the dual colored LED is red, it indicates the onboard DDCH is present
but disabled. When the dual colored LED is green, it indicates the onboard
DDCH is present and enabled. If a DDCH is not configured on the DDP2
card, this lamp is not lit.

Unit 0 Clk Connectors
Two RJ11 connectors for connecting:
•

Digital trunk unit 0 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference
source on clock controller card 0.

•

Digital trunk unit 0 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference
source on clock controller card 1.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card

Unit 1 Clk Connectors
Two RJ11 connectors for connecting:
•

Digital trunk unit 1 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference
source on clock controller card 0.

•

Digital trunk unit 1 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference
source on clock controller card 1.

Connector J5 (TRK)
A 9 pin D-Type connector used to connect:
•

Digital trunk unit 0 receive and transmit Tip / Ring pairs

•

Digital trunk unit 1 receive and transmit Tip / Ring pairs

Connector J6 (DCH)
A 26-pin D-type connector is used to connect the DDP2 card to the external
MSDL or D-channel handler.

System capacity and performance
Physical capacity
Each NT5D97 DDP2 card occupies one slot on the network shelf. Each card
supports two digital trunk circuits and two network loops. The total number
of DDP2 cards per system is limited by the number of network loops,
physical capacity of the shelf, number of DTI2/PRI2 interfaces allowed by
the software and the range of DCH addresses.

D-Channel capacity
The software configuration for the NTBK51AA DDCH is similar to the MSDL
and only supports D-channel functionality.
The system has a total capacity of 16 addresses (Device Addresses or
DNUM) that can be reserved for DCH card, MSDL card or DDCH card. One
exception is DNUM 0 which is commonly assigned to the TTY terminal.
No two different D-Channel providers can share the same DNUM. Hence,
the combined maximum number of DCH, MSDL and DDCH cards in the
system is 16.
The DCH has one D-Channel unit, the DDCH has two D-Channel units,
and the MSDL has a maximum of four units. Therefore, the total number
of D-Channel is derived by the following formula:
Total_Num_DCH-Units = Num_DCHx1 + Num_DDCHx2 + Num_MSDLx4
Therefore, Total_Num_DCH-Units in any given system is between 0-63.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

40 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview

CPU capacity
Using a NT5D97 DDP2 card instead of DTI2/PRI2 cards does not increase
the load on the system CPU. The DDP2 replaces an ENET card and two
DTI2/PRI2 cards. Emulating the ENET card and the overall CPU capacity is
not impacted by using a DDP2 card instead of a DTI2/PRI2 card.

Power requirements
Table 8 "NT5D97 DDP2 power requirements" (page 40) lists the power
requirements for the NT5D97 DDP2 card.
Table 8
NT5D97 DDP2 power requirements
Voltage

Source

Current
DDP2
(without
NTBK51AA)

DDP2
(with
NTBK51AA)

+5V

Backplane

3.8A

+12V

Backplane

25mA

75mA

-12V

Backplane

25mA

75mA

15.6W

20.8W

Total Power (Maximum)

Testability and diagnostics
The DDP2 card supports testing and maintenance functions through the
following procedures:
•

Self test upon power up or reset

•

Signalling test performed in the LD 30

•

Loopback tests, self tests, and continuity tests performed by LD 60
and LD 45

•

The D-Channel (DCH, MSDL, DDCH) maintenance is supported by
LD 96.
Note: The MSDL selftest is not applicable to the NTBK51AA D-Channel
daughterboard.

Cable requirements
This section lists the types of cable used and the lengths required for
internal and external NT5D97 DDP2 connections.
Note: No additional cabling is required for nB+D configurations. Multiple
DDP2 cards and the D-channel are associated through software in
LD 17.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card

DDP2 cable assemblies include:
•

E1 carrier cables
— NTCK45AA (A0407956)
— NT8D7217 (A0617192)
— NTCK78AA (A0618294)
— NTCK79AA (A0618296)

•

DDP2 to QPC471/QPC775 Clock Controller Cables
— NTCG03AA
— NTCG03AB
— NTCG03AC
— NTCG03AD

•

DDP2 to DCH cables
— NTCK46AA
— NTCK46AB
— NTCK46AC
— NTCK46AD

•

DDP2 to MSDL cables
— NTCK80AA
— NTCK80AB
— NTCK80AC
— NTCK80AD

A description of each type of DDP2 cable follows.

E1 carrier cables
NTCK45AA (A0407956) The NTCK45AA (8 ft.) is an 120W cable for
systems equipped with an I/O filter panel, connecting the TRK port (P1,
D-type 9 pin male) on the DDP2 faceplate to the I/O filter (P2, P3 D-type 9
pin males).

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

42 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Figure 9
NTCK45AA

Table 9 "NTCK45AA cable pins" (page 42) lists the pin attributes for the
NTCK45AA cable.
Table 9
NTCK45AA cable pins
Cable

Name

Description

Color

DDP2
pins

I/O Panel
pins

T-PRI0TX

Trunk 0 Transmit Tip

Black

P1-1

P2-6

R-PRI0TX

Trunk 0 Transmit Ring

Red

P2-2

P2-7

T-PRI0RX

Trunk 0 Receive Tip

Black

P1-3

P2-2

R-PRI0RX

Trunk 0 Receive Ring

White

P1-4

P2-3

GND Shield Wire

Bare

N/C

Case P2

GND Shield Wire

Bare

N/C

Case P2

Standard Wire (3")

Bare

Case P2

P2-5

Standard Wire (3")

Bare

Case P2

P2-9

T-PRI1TX

Trunk 1 Transmit Tip

Black

P1-5

P3-6

R-PRI1TX

Trunk 1 Transmit Ring

Red

P1-6

P3-7

T-PRI1RX

Trunk 1 Receive Tip

Black

P1-7

P3-2

R-PRI1RX

Trunk 1 Receive Ring

White

P1-8

P3-3

GND Shield Wire

Bare

N/C

Case P3

GND Shield Wire

Bare

N/C

Case P3

Standard Wire (3")

Bare

Case P3

P3-5

Standard Wire (3")

Bare

Case P3

P3-9

NT8D7217 (A0617192) The NT8D7217 (50 ft.) is a 120W cable for
systems equipped with an I/O filter panel, connecting the 9 pin I/O filter
connector to the 9 pin NCTE connector.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card
Figure 10
NT8D7217

Table 10 "NT8D7217 cable pins" (page 43) which follows lists the pin
attributes for the NT8D7217 cable.
Table 10
NT8D7217 cable pins
Cable

Name

Description

Color

DDP2
pins

I/O Panel
pins

T-PRI0TX

Trunk 0 Transmit Tip

Black

P1-6

P2-6

R-PRI0TX

Trunk 0 Transmit Ring

White

P1-7

P2-7

T-PRI0RX

Trunk 0 Receive Tip

Black

P1-2

P2-2

R-PRI0RX

Trunk 0 Receive Ring

Red

P1-3

P2-3

GND Shield Wire

Bare

P1-5

N/C

GND Shield Wire

Bare

P1-9

N/C

T-PRI1TX

Trunk 1 Transmit Tip

Black

P1-6

P2-6

R-PRI1TX

Trunk 1 Transmit Ring

White

P1-7

P2-7

T-PRI1RX

Trunk 1 Receive Tip

Black

P1-2

P2-2

R-PRI1RX

Trunk 1 Receive Ring

Red

P1-3

P2-3

GND Shield Wire

Bare

P1-5

N/C

GND Shield Wire

Bare

P1-9

N/C

NTCK78AA (A0618294) The NTCK78AA (50 ft.) is a 120W cable for
connecting the TRK port on the DDP2 faceplate (P1, D-type 9 pin male)
to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) (P2, P3 D-type 15-pin males). The
NTCK78AA is used for systems not equipped with an I/O filter panel.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

44 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Figure 11
NTCK78AA

Table 11 "NTCK78AA cable pins" (page 44) lists the pin attributes for the
NTCK78AA cable.
Table 11
NTCK78AA cable pins
Cable

Name

Description

Color

DDP2
pins

NCTE
pins

T-PRI0TX

Trunk 0 Transmit Tip

Black

P1-1

P2-1

R-PRI0TX

Trunk 0 Transmit Ring

Red

P1-2

P2-9

T-PRI0RX

Trunk 0 Receive Tip

Black

P1-3

P2-3

R-PRI0RX

Trunk 0 Receive Ring

White

P1-4

P2-11

GND Shield Wire

Bare

P1 Case

P2-2

GND Shield Wire

Bare

P1 Case

P2-4

T-PRI1TX

Trunk 1 Transmit Tip

Black

P1-5

P3-1

R-PRI1TX

Trunk 1 Transmit Ring

Red

P1-6

P3-9

T-PRI1RX

Trunk 1 Receive Tip

Black

P1-7

P3-3

R-PRI1RX

Trunk 1 Receive Ring

White

P1-8

P3-11

GND Shield Wire

Bare

P1 Case

P3-2

GND Shield Wire

Bare

P1 Case

P3-4

NTCK79AA (A0618296) The NTCK79AA (40 ft) is a 75W coaxial cable for
connecting the TRK port on the DDP2 faceplate (P1, D-type 9 pin male) to
the Line Terminating Unit (LTU) (P2, P3, P4, P5 BNC males).

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card
Figure 12
NTCK79AA

Table 12 "NTCK79AA cable pins" (page 45) lists the pin attributes for the
NTCK79AA cable.
Table 12
NTCK79AA cable pins
Cable

Name

Description

Color

DDP2
pins

NCTE
pins

T-PRI0TX

Trunk 0 Transmit Tip

Red

P1-1

P2 inner
conductor

R-PRI0TX

Trunk 0 Transmit Ring

Red

P1-2

P2 shield

T-PRI0RX

Trunk 0 Receive Tip

Green

P1-3

P3 inner
conductor

R-PRI0RX

Trunk 0 Receive Ring

Green

P1-4

P3 shield

T-PRI1TX

Trunk 1 Transmit Tip

Red

P1-5

P4 inner
conductor

R-PRI1TX

Trunk 1 Transmit Ring

Red

P1-6

P4 shield

T-PRI1RX

Trunk 1 Transmit Tip

Green

P1-7

P5 inner
conductor

R-PRI1RX

Trunk 1 Receive Ring

Green

P1-8

P5 shield

Outer metalized PVC shield

Bare

N/C

P1 Case

3 stranded wire

Bare

N/C

P1 Case

Reference clock cables
The NTCG03AA (14 ft), NTCG03AB (2.8 ft), NTCG03AC (4.0 ft), or
NTCG03AD (7 ft), is a DDP2 card to Clock Controller cable, connecting
each of the CLK0 or CLK1 ports on the DDP2 faceplate to the primary or
secondary source ports on Clock Controller card 0 or 1.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

46 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Figure 13
NTCG03AA/AB/AC/AD

MSDL/DCH cables
External DCH cable The NTCK46 cable connects the DDP2 card to the
NT6D11AF/NT5K75AA/NT5K35AA D-Channel Handler card. The cable
is available in four different sizes:
•

NTCK46AA (6 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable

•

NTCK46AB (18 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable

•

NTCK46AC (35 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable

•

NTCK46AD (50 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable

Figure 14
NTCK46AA/AB/AC/AD

External MSDL cable The NTCK80 cable connects the DDP2 card to the
NT6D80 MSDL card. The cable is available in four different sizes:
•

NTCK80AA (6 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable

•

NTCK80AB (18 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable

•

NTCK80AC (35 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable

•

NTCK80AD (50 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card

Figure 15
NTCK80AA/AB/AC/AD

Cable diagrams
Figure 16 "DDP2 cable for systems with an I/O panel" (page 48) and
Figure 17 "DDP2 cable for systems without an I/O panel" (page 49) provide
examples of typical cabling configurations for the DDP2.
Figure 16 "DDP2 cable for systems with an I/O panel" (page 48) shows a
typical DDP2 cabling for a system with an I/O panel, with the connection
between the I/O panel and a Network Channel Terminating Equipment
(NCTE).
Figure 17 "DDP2 cable for systems without an I/O panel" (page 49) shows
cabling for a system without an I/O panel. Here, the DDP2 faceplate is
cabled directly to the NCTE.
Note: Since several clock cabling options exist, none has been
represented in the diagrams. Refer to "Clock configurations" (page
52) for a description on each available option.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

48 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Figure 16
DDP2 cable for systems with an I/O panel

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card

Figure 17
DDP2 cable for systems without an I/O panel

Clock for the NT5D97
Clock operation
There are two types of clock operation — tracking mode and free-run mode.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

50 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview

Tracking mode In tracking mode, the DDP2 loop supplies an external
clock reference to a clock controller. Two DDP2 loops can operate in
tracking mode, with one defined as the primary reference source for clock
synchronization, the other defined as the secondary reference source. The
secondary reference acts as a back-up to the primary reference.
As shown in Figure 18 "Clock Controller primary and secondary tracking"
(page 50), a system with dual CPUs can have two clock controllers (CC-0
and CC-1). One clock controller acts as a back-up to the other. The clock
controllers should be completely locked to the reference clock.
Figure 18
Clock Controller primary and secondary tracking

Free run (non-tracking) mode The clock synchronization of the system
can operate in free-run mode if:
•

no loop is defined as the primary or secondary clock reference,

•

the primary and secondary references are disabled, or

•

the primary and secondary references are in local (near end) alarm
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card

Reference clock errors
The system software checks at intervals of 1 to 15 minutes to see if a clock
controller or reference-clock error has occurred. (The interval of this check
can be configured in LD 73).
In tracking mode, at any one time, there is one active clock controller which
is tracking on one reference clock. If a clock controller error is detected, the
system switches to the back-up clock controller, without affecting which
reference clock is being tracked.
A reference-clock error occurs when there is a problem with the clock driver
or with the reference clock at the far end. If the clock controller detects a
reference-clock error, the reference clocks are switched.

Automatic clock recovery
A command for automatic clock recovery can be selected in LD 60 with
the command EREF.
A DDP2 loop is disabled when it enters a local-alarm condition. If the local
alarm is cleared, the loop is enabled automatically. When the loop is
enabled, clock tracking is restored in the following conditions:
•

If the loop is assigned as the primary reference clock but the clock
controller is tracking on the secondary reference or in free-run mode, it
is restored to tracking on primary.

•

If the loop is assigned as the secondary reference clock but the clock
controller is in free-run mode, it is restored to tracking on secondary.

•

If the clock check indicates the switch is in free-run mode:
— Tracking is restored to the primary reference clock if defined.
— If the primary reference is disabled or in local alarm, tracking is
restored to the secondary reference clock if defined.
Note: If the system is put into free-run mode by the craftsperson,
it resumes tracking on a reference clock unless the clock-switching
option is disabled (LD 60, command MREF), or the reference clock is
"undefined" in the database.

Automatic clock switching
If the EREF command is selected in LD 60, tracking on the primary or
secondary reference clock is automatically switched in the following manner:
•

If software is unable to track on the assigned primary reference clock, it
switches to the secondary reference clock and sends appropriate DTC
maintenance messages.

•

If software is unable to track on the assigned secondary reference clock,
it switches to free run.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

52 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview

Clock configurations
Clock Controllers can be used in a single or a dual CPU system.
A single CPU system has one Clock Controller card. This card can receive
reference clocks from two sources referred to as the primary and secondary
sources. These two sources can originate from a PRI2, DTI2, etc. PRI2
cards such as the NT8D72BA are capable of supplying two references of
the same clock source. These are known as Ref1 (available at J1) and Ref2
(available at J2) on the NT8D72BA.
The NT5D12 card is capable of supplying two references from each clock
source, i.e., four references in total. NT5D12 can supply Clk0 and Clk1 from
Unit 0 and Clk0 and Clk1 from Unit 1. Either Unit 0 or Unit 1 can originate
primary source, as shown in Figure 19 "Clock Controller - Option 1" (page
54) through Figure 22 "Clock Controller - Option 4" (page 57) on pages
Figure 18 "Clock Controller primary and secondary tracking" (page 50) to
Figure 22 "Clock Controller - Option 4" (page 57).
There is one Clock Controller cable required for the DDP2 card, which
is available in four sizes; this is the NTCG03AA/AB/AC/AD. Refer to
"Reference clock cables" (page 45) for more information.
Table 13 "Clock Controller options - summary" (page 52) summarizes the
clocking options. Table 14 "Clock Controller options - description" (page
53) explains the options in more detail.
Table 13
Clock Controller options - summary
CC Option

CPU Type

Notes

Option 1

Single

Ref from P0 on Clk0
Ref from P1 on Clk0

Option 2

Dual

Ref from P0 on Clk0
Ref from P0 on Clk1

Option 3

Dual

Ref from P1 on Clk0
Ref from P1 on Clk1

Option 4

Dual

Ref from P0 on Clk0
Ref from P0 on Clk1
Ref from P1 on Clk0
Ref from P1 on Clk1

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card

Table 14
Clock Controller options - description
Clock Option

Notes

Option 1

This option provides a single CPU system with 2 clock
sources derived from the 2 ports of the DDP2.
Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Unit 0.
Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Unit 1.
Refer to Figure 19 "Clock Controller - Option 1" (page
54).

Option 2

This option provides a Dual CPU system with 2
references of a clock source derived from port 0 of the
DDP2.
Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from
Unit 0.
Connector Clk1 provides a Ref 2 clock source from
Unit 0.
Refer to Figure 20 "Clock Controller - Option 2" (page
55)

Option 3

This option provides a Dual CPU system with 2
references of a clock source derived from port 1 of the
DDP2.
Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from
Unit 1.
Connector Clk1 provides a Ref 2 clock source from
Unit 1.
Refer to Figure 21 "Clock Controller - Option 3" (page
56)

Option 4

This option provides a Dual CPU system with 2
references from each clock source derived from the
DDP2.
Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from
Unit 0.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

54 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview

Clock Option

Notes
Connector Clk1 provides a Ref 2 clock source from
Unit 0.
Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from
Unit 1.
Connector Clk1 provides a Ref 2 clock source from
Unit 1.
Refer to Figure 22 "Clock Controller - Option 4" (page
57).

Figure 19
Clock Controller - Option 1

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card
Figure 20
Clock Controller - Option 2

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

56 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Figure 21
Clock Controller - Option 3

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI 57
Figure 22
Clock Controller - Option 4

NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI
The NT5D12 is a dual-port 1.5 DTI/PRI card (the DDP firmware functions in
DTI or PRI mode) integrating the functionality of two QPC472 DTI/DDP2
PRI cards and one QPC414 ENET into one card. The NT5D12 occupies a
single Network shelf slot and provides two DTI/PRI network connections,
an optional connection to an external D-Channel Handler, the QPC757
D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI) or NT6D80 Multipurpose Serial Data
Link (MSDL), and an optional plug-on NTBK51AA Downloadable D-Channel
daughterboard (DDCH.)
The NT5D12 DDP card supports all features (except the echo canceller and
protocol conversion) of the QPC720. In addition, it maintains the backward
compatibility of QPC720.
The NT5D12 DDP card hardware design uses a B57 ASIC E1/T1 framer.
The carrier specifications comply with the ANSI TI.403 specification. The
NT5D12 provides an interface to the 1.5 Mb external digital line either
directly or through an office repeater, Line Terminating Unit (LTU), or
Channel Service Unit (CSU).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

58 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview

D-Channel and MSDL interface
The connection between the DDP card and the DCHI or MSDL is via a 26
pin female D type connector. The data signals conform to the electrical
characteristics of the EIA standard RS-422.
Two control signals are used to communicate the D-Channel link status
to the DCHI or MSDL. These are:
•

Receiver Ready (RR), originating at the DDP card, to indicate to the
DCHI or MSDL that the D-channel link is operational.

•

Transmitter Ready (TR), originating at the DCHI or MSDL, to indicate to
the DDP card that the DCHI or MSDL are ready to use the D-Channel
link.

Table 15 "DCHI/MSDL Receiver Ready control signals" (page 58) indicates
how the RR control signal operates with regard to the DDP status.
Table 15
DCHI/MSDL Receiver Ready control signals
RR State

Condition

D-Channel data rate selected at 64 Kbps or 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps
inverted
and
PRI loop is enabled
and
PRI link is not in RED alarm mode state
and
PRI link is not transmitting a yellow alarm pattern
and
PRI link is not receiving a Remote Alarm Indication from the
remote facility
and
PRI link is not in FA3 mode

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI 59

RR State

Condition

and
Transmitter Ready (TR) control signal from the DCHI/MSDL is
ON
OFF

All other conditions

NT5D12 faceplate
Figure 23 "NT5D12 faceplate - general view" (page 60) and Figure 24
"DDP faceplate - detailed view" (page 61) illustrate the faceplate layout
for the NT5D12 DDP card. The faceplate contains an enable/disable
switch; a DDCH status LED; 6 x 2 trunk port status LEDs; and six external
connectors. Table 7 "External connectors and LEDs" (page 36) shows the
name of each connector, its designation with respect to the faceplate and
the name and description of the card it is connected to. Also shown are the
names of the LEDs.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

60 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Figure 23
NT5D12 faceplate - general view

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI 61
Figure 24
DDP faceplate - detailed view

Table 16
External connectors and LEDs
Function
Switch

Faceplate
Designator
ENB/DIS

Type
Plastic, ESD
protected

Description
Card Enable/disable switch

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

62 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview

Faceplate
Designator

Function

Type

Description

Port 0 Clock 0

RJ11 Connector

Connects reference clock to
Clock Controller card

Port 0 Clock 1

RJ11 Connector

Connects reference clock to
Clock Controller card

Port 1 Clock 0

RJ11 Connector

Connects reference clock to
Clock Controller card

Port 1 Clock 1

RJ11 Connector

Connects reference clock to
Clock Controller card

J5 TRK

9 Pin Female

Two external DS-1 Trunk 0 and
Trunk 1

Connectors

D Connector
J6 DCH

26 Pin Female

Connects to DCHI or MSDL

D Connector

LEDs

OOS

2 Red LEDs

ENET 0 or ENET 1 disabled

DIS

2 Red LEDs

Trunk 0 or Trunk 1 disabled

ACT

2 Green LEDs

Trunk 0 or Trunk 1 lines active

RED

2 Red LEDs

Red Alarm on Trunk 0 or Trunk 1

YEL

2 Yellow LEDs

Yellow Alarm on Trunk 0 or Trunk
1

LBK

2 Green LEDs

Loop Back test being performed
on Trunk 0 or Trunk 1

DCH

Bicolor Red/Green LED

NTBK51AA status

The following is a brief description of each element on the faceplate:

Enable/Disable Switch
This switch is used to disable the card prior to insertion or removal from
the network shelf; while this switch is in disable position, the card will not
respond to system CPU.

Port Out of Service LEDs
Two red LEDs indicate if the "ENET0" and "ENET1" portion of the card are
disabled. These LEDs are lit in the following cases:
•

When the enable/disable switch is in state disable (lit by hardware)

•

After power-up, before the card is enabled

•

When the ENET port on the card is disabled by software.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI 63

Trunk Port Disable LEDs
Two red LEDs indicate if the "trunk port 0" and "trunk port 1" portion of the
card are disabled. These LEDs are turned on in the following cases:
•

When the enable/disable switch is in state disable (lit by hardware).

•

After power-up, before the card is enabled.

•

When digital trunk interface on the card is deactivated by software.

ACT LEDs
Two green LEDs indicate if the "trunk port 0" and "trunk port 1" portion
of the card is active.

RED LEDs
Two red LEDs indicate if the near end detects absence of incoming signal
or loss of synchronization in "trunk port 0" or "trunk port 1" respectively.
The Near End Alarm causes a Far End Alarm signal to be transmitted to
the far end.

YEL LEDs
Two yellow LEDs indicate if a Far End Alarm has been reported by the far
end (usually in response to a Near End Alarm condition at the far end)
on "trunk port 0" or "trunk port 1".

LBK LEDs
Two green LEDs indicate the remote loopback test is being performed on
trunk port 0 or trunk port 1. The loopback indication is active when the
digital trunk is in remote loopback mode (T1 signals received from the far
end are regenerated and transmitted to the far end.) Normal call processing
is inhibited during remote loopback test.

DCH LED
A dual color red/green LED indicates that the onboard DDCH is present
but disabled (red), or is present and enabled (green). If a DDCH is not
configured on the DDP card, this lamp is not lit.

Port 0 Clk Connectors
Two RJ11 connectors for connecting:
•

Digital trunk port 0 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference
source on clock controller card 0.

•

Digital trunk port 0 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference
source on clock controller card 1.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

64 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview

Port 1 Clk Connectors
Two RJ11 connectors for connecting:
•

Digital trunk port 1 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference
source on clock controller card 0.

•

Digital trunk port 1 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference
source on clock controller card 1.

Connector J5 (TRK)
A 9 pin D-Type connector used to connect:
•

Digital trunk port 0 receive and transmit Tip / Ring pairs.

•

Digital trunk port 1 receive and transmit Tip / Ring pairs.

Connector J6 (DCH)
A 26 pin D-type connector, used to connect the DDP card to MSDL or
QPC757 external D-channel handlers.

System capacity and performance
Physical capacity
Each DDP card occupies one slot on the network shelf. It supports two
digital trunk circuits and two network loops. The total number of DDP cards
per system is limited by the number of network loops, physical capacity of
the shelf, number of DTI/PRI interfaces allowed by the software and the
range of DCH addresses.

D-Channel capacity
The software configuration for the NTBK51AA DDCH is similar to the MSDL.
It is both physical and logical, and supports D-Channel functionality only.
The system has a total capacity of 16 addresses (Device Addresses or
DNUM) that can be reserved for DCHI card, MSDL card or DDCH card. One
exception is DNUM 0 which is commonly assigned to the System Monitor.
No two different D-Channel providers can share the same DNUM. Hence,
the combined maximum number of DCHI, MSDL and DDCH cards in the
system is 16.
The DCHI and DDCH have two D-Channel units, the MSDL has four.
Therefore the total number of D-Channels is derived by the following formula:
Total_Num_DCH-Units = Num_DCHIx2 + Num_DDCHx2 + Num_MSDLx4
Therefore, Total_Num_DCH-Units in any given system is between 0-63.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI 65

CPU capacity
Using a NT512 DDP card instead of DTI/PRI cards does not increase
the load on the system CPU. The DDP replaces an ENET card and two
DTI/PRI cards, it emulates the ENET card and the overall CPU capacity is
not impacted by usage of DDP card instead of a DTI/PRI card.

Power requirements
Table 17 "DDP power requirements" (page 65) lists the power requirements
for the DDP card.
Table 17
DDP power requirements
Voltage

Source

Current
DDP (without
NTBK51AA)

DDP (with
NTBK51AA)

+5V

Backplane

3.8A

+12V

Backplane

25mA

75mA

-12V

Backplane

25mA

75mA

15.6W

20.8W

Total Power (Maximum)

Testability and diagnostics
The DDP card supports all current QPC720 testing and maintenance
functions through the following procedures:
•

Self test upon power up or reset;

•

Signaling test performed in the LD 30;

•

Loopback tests, self tests, and continuity tests performed by LD 60 and
LD 45;

•

The D-Channel (MSDL, DCHI, DDCH) maintenance is supported by
LD 96.

NT5D12 Cable requirements
This section lists the types of cable used and the lengths required for
internal and external NT5D12 DDP connections.
Note 1: No additional cabling is required for nB+D configurations.
Multiple DDPs and the D-channel are associated through software in
LD 17.
Note 2: A detailed discussion of each type of DDP cable listed below
follows.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

66 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview

New DDP cable assemblies include:
•

System Trunk Tip/Ring Cables
— NT5D16AA
— NT5D17AA
— QCAD133

•

DDP to QPC471/QPC775 Clock Controller Cables
— NTCG03AA
— NTCG03AB
— NTCG03AC
— NTCG03AD

•

DDP to DCHI cables
— NTCK46AA
— NTCK46AB
— NTCK46AC
— NTCK46AD

•

DDP to MSDL cables
— NTCK80AA
— NTCK80AB
— NTCK80AC
— NTCK80AD

Trunk Tip/Ring cables
NT5D16AA
The NT5D16AA (8 ft.) is a 100W cable for systems equipped with an I/O
filter panel, connecting the 9 pin D-type TRK port on the DDP faceplate
to the I/O filter.
Note: On the I/O panel side, this cable is equipped with a monitor
bantam plug and a 15 pin D-type trunk connector mounted on a small
PCB. There are no bantam plugs on the DDP faceplate.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI 67
Figure 25
NT5D16AA

Table 18 "NT5D16AA cable pins" (page 67) lists the pin attributes for the
NT5D16AA cable.
Table 18
NT5D16AA cable pins
Cable

Name

Description

Color

DDP
pins (J5)

I/O Panel
pins (J2, J3)

T-PRI0TX

Trunk 0 Transmit Tip

Black

J5-1

P0J3-1
P0J2-3

R-PRI0TX

Trunk 0 Transmit Ring

Red

J5-2

P0J3-9
P0J2-9

T-PRI0RX

Trunk 0 Receive Tip

Black

J5-3

P0J3-3
P0J2-4

R-PRI0RX

Trunk 0 Receive Ring

White

J5-4

P0J3-11
P0J2-10

GND Shield Wire

Bare

N/C

Case P0

GND Shield Wire

Bare

N/C

Case P0

T-PRI1TX

Trunk 1 Transmit Tip

Black

J5-5

P1J3-1
P1J2-3

R-PRI1TX

Trunk 1 Transmit Ring

Red

J5-6

P1J3-9
P1J2-9

T-PRI1RX

Trunk 1 Receive Tip

Black

J5-7

P1J3-3
P1J2-4

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

68 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview

Cable

Name

Description

Color

DDP
pins (J5)

I/O Panel
pins (J2, J3)

R-PRI1RX

Trunk 1 Receive Ring

White

J5-8

P1J3-11
P1J2-10

GND Shield Wire

Bare

N/C

Case P1

GND Shield Wire

Bare

N/C

Case P1

Reference clock cables
The NTCG03AA (14 ft.), NTCG03AB (2.8 ft.), NTCG03AC (4.0 ft.), or
NTCG03AD (7 ft.) is a DDP card to Clock Controller cable, connecting
each of the CLK0 or CLK1 ports on the DDP faceplate to the primary or
secondary source ports on Clock Controller card 0 or 1.
Figure 26
NTCG03AA, NTCG03AB, NTCG03AC, or NTCG03AD

MSDL/DCHI cables
External DCHI cable
The NTCK46 cable connects the DDP card to the QPC757 DCHI D-Channel
Handler card. The cable is available in four different sizes:
•

NTCK46AA (6 ft.) - DDP to DCHI cable

•

NTCK46AB (18 ft.) - DDP to DCHI cable

•

NTCK46AC (35 ft.) - DDP to DCHI cable

•

NTCK46AD (50 ft.) - DDP to DCHI cable

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI 69
Figure 27
NTCK46AA, NTCK46AB, NTCK46AC, NTCK46AD

External MSDL cable
The NTCK80 cable connects the DDP card to the NT6D80 MSDL card. The
cable is available in four different sizes:
•

NTCK80AA (6 ft.) - DDP to MSDL cable

•

NTCK80AB (18 ft.) - DDP to MSDL cable

•

NTCK80AC (35 ft.) - DDP to MSDL cable

•

NTCK80AD (50 ft.) - DDP to MSDL cable

Figure 28
NTCK80AA, NTCK80AB, NTCK80AC, NTCK80AD

Cable diagrams
Figure 29 "DDP cable for systems with an I/O panel" (page 70) provides an
example of a typical cabling configuration for the DDP. Please note that
these figures are representational only, and are not intended to show the
relational card slot position of the various cards.
Figure 29 "DDP cable for systems with an I/O panel" (page 70) shows
a typical DDP cabling for a system Option with an I/O panel, with the
connection between the I/O panel and a Network Channel Terminating
Equipment (NCTE).

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

70 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview

Note: Since there exists several clock cabling options, none has been
represented in the diagram. Please refer to "Clock configurations" (page
72) for a description on each available option.
Figure 29
DDP cable for systems with an I/O panel

Clock
There are two types of clock operation - tracking mode and free-run mode.

Tracking mode
In tracking mode, the DDP loop supplies an external clock reference to a
clock controller. Two DDP loops can operate in tracking mode, with one
defined as the primary reference source for clock synchronization, the other
defined as the secondary reference source. The secondary reference acts
as a back-up to the primary reference.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI 71

As shown in Figure 30 "Clock Controller primary and secondary tracking"
(page 71), a system with dual CPUs can have two clock controllers (CC-0
and CC-1). One clock controller acts as a back-up to the other. Lock the
clock controllers to the reference clock.
Figure 30
Clock Controller primary and secondary tracking

Free run (non-tracking) mode
The clock synchronization of the system can operate in free-run mode if:
•

no loop is defined as the primary or secondary clock reference,

•

the primary and secondary references are disabled, or

•

the primary and secondary references are in local (near end) alarm.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

72 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview

In tracking mode, at any one time, there is one active clock controller which
is tracking on one reference clock. If a clock controller error is detected, the
system switches to the back-up clock controller, without affecting which
reference clock is being tracked.
A reference-clock error occurs when there is a problem with the clock driver
or with the reference clock at the far end. If the clock controller detects a
reference-clock error, the reference clocks are switched.

Automatic clock recovery
A command for automatic clock recovery can be selected in LD 60 with
the command EREF.
A DDP loop is disabled when it enters a local-alarm condition. If the local
alarm is cleared, the loop is enabled automatically. When the loop is
enabled, clock tracking is restored in the following conditions:
•

If the loop is assigned as the primary reference clock but the clock
controller is tracking on the secondary reference or in free-run mode, it
is restored to tracking on primary.

•

If the loop is assigned as the secondary reference clock but the clock
controller is in free-run mode, it is restored to tracking on secondary.

•

Automatic clock switching
If the EREF command is selected in LD 60, tracking on the primary or
secondary reference clock is automatically switched in the following manner:
•

If software is unable to track on the assigned primary reference clock, it
switches to the secondary reference clock and sends appropriate DTC
maintenance messages.

•

If software is unable to track on the assigned secondary reference clock,
it switches to free run.

Clock configurations
Clock Controllers can be used in a single or a dual CPU system.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI 73

A single CPU system has one Clock Controller card. This card can receive
reference clocks from two sources referred to as the primary and secondary
sources. These two sources can originate from a PRI, DTI, etc. PRI cards
such as the QPC720 are capable of supplying two references of the same
clock source. These are known as Ref1 (available at J1) and Ref2 (available
at J2) on the QPC720.
The NT5D12 card is capable of supplying two references from each clock
source, i.e., four references in total. NT5D12 can thus supply Clk0 and Clk1
from Port 0 and Clk0 and Clk1 from Port 1. Either Port 0 or Port 1 can
originate the primary source, as shown in Figure 31 "Clock Controller Option 1" (page 75) through Figure 34 "Clock Controller - Option 4" (page
78) to Figure 34 "Clock Controller - Option 4" (page 78).
There is one new Clock Controller cable required for the new DDP card,
which is available in four sizes; this is the NTCG03AA/AB/AC/AD. Refer to
"Reference clock cables" (page 68) for more information.
"Reference clock cables" (page 45) summarizes the clock options. Table
20 "Clock Controller options - description" (page 74) explains the options in
more detail.
Table 19
Clock Controller options- summary
CC Option

CPU Type

Notes

Option 1

Single

Ref from P0 on Clk0
Ref from P1 on Clk0

Option 2

Dual

Ref from P0 on Clk0
Ref from P0 on Clk1

Option 3

Dual

Ref from P1 on Clk0
Ref from P1 on Clk1

Option 4

Dual

Ref from P0 on Clk0
Ref from P0 on Clk1
Ref from P1 on Clk0
Ref from P1 on Clk1

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

74 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Table 20
Clock Controller options - description
Clock Option

Notes

Option 1

This option provides a single CPU system with 2 clock sources
derived from the 2 ports of the DDP.
Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Port 0.
Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Port 1.
Refer to Figure 31 "Clock Controller - Option 1" (page 75)

Option 2

This option provides a Dual CPU system with 2 references of a
clock source derived from port 0 of the DDP.
Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from Port 0.
Connector Clk1 provides a Ref 2 clock source from Port 0.
Refer to Figure 32 "Clock Controller - Option 2" (page 76)

Option 3

This option provides a Dual CPU system with 2 references of a
clock source derived from port 1 of the DDP.
Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from Port 1.
Connector Clk1 provides a Ref 2 clock source from Port 1.
Refer to Figure 33 "Clock Controller - Option 3" (page 77)

Option 4

This option provides a Dual CPU system with 2 references from
each clock source derived from the DDP.
Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from Port 0.
Connector Clk1 provides a Ref 2 clock source from Port 0.
Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from Port 1.
Connector Clk1 provides a Ref 2 clock source from Port 1.
Refer to Figure 34 "Clock Controller - Option 4" (page 78)

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI 75
Figure 31
Clock Controller - Option 1

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

76 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Figure 32
Clock Controller - Option 2

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI 77
Figure 33
Clock Controller - Option 3

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

78 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Figure 34
Clock Controller - Option 4

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

DCH installation
Contents
The section contains information on the following topics:
"Install the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCH" (page 79)
"Install the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCH" (page 79)
"Set up the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCHI" (page 80)
"DIP switch settings" (page 80)
"Protocol selection" (page 80)
"Valid switch combinations" (page 81)
"Jumper settings" (page 82)
"Port addressing modes" (page 83)
"Port address switch settings" (page 84)
"Install the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCHI" (page 85)
"Remove the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCH" (page 86)
"Install the QPC757 DCH" (page 87)
"Port address switch settings" (page 89)
"D-channel parameter downloading" (page 90)
"Remove the QPC757 DCHI" (page 90)

Install the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCH
Installation procedures for the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, and NT6D11AE
DCHI cards are the same for all Large Systems. These instructions apply to
hardware both for primary and backup D-channels. D-channel lines must be
conditioned for 64K before D-channels can be brought up.
Note: To configure J1, the asynchronous port on the DCHI card, refer
to the documentation of the application being interfaced, and to Circuit
Card Reference (NN43001-311). J1 configuration is not described in
this technical document.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

80 DCH installation

Set up the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCHI
DIP switch settings
The NT6D11AB/AE/AF has three sets of DIP switches. Each port has its
own bank of 10 DIP switches (SW1 & SW2) to select the port address (8
bits) and mode of operation (2 bits). SW1 is used for port 0 settings, SW2 is
used for port 1 settings. SW3 is used to select the D-channel protocol. Port
0 is used to select whether the asynchronous ESDI port is be disabled or
not. Port 1 is used to select the standard or expanded D-channel addressing
mode on the NT6D11AB/AE/AF.
The DIP switches are located as shown by Figure 35 "NT6D11 DIP
switches" (page 80).
Figure 35
NT6D11 DIP switches

Protocol selection
SW3 is used to select the D-channel protocol, as shown by Table 21
"Protocol selection switch settings" (page 81).
Note: The setting must be 1 for ISDN applications.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Set up the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCHI

Table 21
Protocol selection switch settings
Protocol

Switch Setting
SW3.1

SW3.2

DPNSS1

ISDN

Valid switch combinations
The following are the only allowable switch setting combinations (not
including address switch settings).

Port 0
Port 0 can be configured as asynchronous ESDI, or disabled. If the port is
configured as disabled, it will not be visible to the system CPU. Refer to
Table 22 "Port 0 settings" (page 81).
Table 22
Port 0 settings
Mode

Switch setting
SW1.1

SW1.2

SW3.1

SW3.2

Asynchronous ESDI

Port disabled

Port 1
The following are the only valid emulation mode combinations. If the port
is configured as disabled, it will not be visible to the system CPU. Refer to
Table 23 "Port 1 settings" (page 81).
Note: The ISDN emulation must be selected.
Table 23
Port 1 settings
Mode

Emulates

Switch setting
SW2.1

SW2.2

SW3.1

SW3.2

DPNSS1

NT5K35

ISDN

NT6D11

Expanded
DPNSS1

NT5K75

Port disabled

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

82 DCH installation

Jumper settings
The NT6D11AB/AE/AF has two banks of option straps, one for each port.
These select between DCE and DTE operation and whether the signalling
interface is RS232 or RS422. Refer to Figure 36 "NT6D11 DCH with
ISL high-speed programming jumper settings" (page 82) and Figure 37
"NT6D11 DCH with ISL low-speed programming jumper settings" (page 83).
Figure 36
NT6D11 DCH with ISL high-speed programming jumper settings

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Set up the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCHI

Figure 37
NT6D11 DCH with ISL low-speed programming jumper settings

Port addressing modes
Port 0 Mode selection
Port 0 is used to select whether the asynchronous ESDI port is be disabled
or not. Refer to Table 24 "Port 0 mode selection" (page 83).
Note: The asynchronous ESDI port must be set to "disabled".
Table 24
Port 0 mode selection
Port Mode

Switch Setting
SW1.1

SW1.2

Not used

Asynchronous ESDI

Port disabled

Port 1 mode selection
Port 1 is used to select the standard or expanded D-channel addressing
mode on the NT6D11AB/AE/AF. Refer to Table 25 "Port 1 mode selection"
(page 84).

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

84 DCH installation
Table 25
Port 1 mode selection
Port Mode

Switch Setting
SW2.1

SW2.2

Synchronous, D-channel, expanded addressing

Not used

Port disabled

Synchronous, D-channel, standard addressing

Note: THIS SELECTION MUST BE MADE FOR
ISDN.

Port address switch settings
Port address switch settings in the standard mode, for ISDN
Table 26 "Port address switch settings for ISDN" (page 84) depicts the port
address switch settings that apply to SW1 or SW2, the D-channel port,
for ISDN mode.
Table 26
Port address switch settings for ISDN
Port Address

Switch Setting
Device No.

Half Group No.
S3

S10

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Install the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCHI

Port Address

Switch Setting
Device No.

Half Group No.
S3

S10

16-31

32-47

48-63

64-79

80-95

96-111

112-127

Install the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCHI
Follow Procedure 1 "Install the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCH"
(page 85) to install the NT6D11 DCH on the Large System.
Procedure 1
Install the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCH

Step

Action

Determine the cabinet and shelf location for the circuit pack being
installed.
The NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, or NT6D11AF DCHI card can be
installed in any slot appropriate for an I/O port card on a Network
shelf. (The NT6D11 DCHI card can be located on the Common
Equipment shelf only on single-CPU switches.)

Unpack and inspect the card.

Set the option switches on the DCHI card. For PRA capability, set
port J2 to odd. For ISL capability, set port J2 for high speed or low
speed operation (See Figure 36 "NT6D11 DCH with ISL high-speed
programming jumper settings" (page 82), Figure 37 "NT6D11 DCH
with ISL low-speed programming jumper settings" (page 83), and
Table 26 "Port address switch settings for ISDN" (page 84) starting
on Figure 36 "NT6D11 DCH with ISL high-speed programming
jumper settings" (page 82)).

Set faceplate toggle switch to DISABLE.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

86 DCH installation

Install the DCHI card into the assigned shelf and slot.

Connect DCHI port J2 to the NT8D72AB or NT8D72BA PRI port J5
with a QCAD328A cable.

Set faceplate toggle switch to ENABLE.

Coordinate the start-up and verification of the DCHI with the start-up
of the PRI.

Enable the DCHI card using LD 96, command ENL DCHI N.
—End—

Remove the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCH
Use Procedure 2 "Remove the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCH"
(page 86) to remove the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCH from
a Large System.

CAUTION
The NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCH must be software
disabled before it is hardware disabled, or initialization will occur.

Procedure 2
Remove the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCH

Step

Action

Disable the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCHI using LD 96,
command DIS DCHI N.

If asynchronous port J1 is enabled, it must also be software disabled,
using LD 37, or initialization will occur.

If the circuit pack is being completely removed, not replaced, remove
data from memory.

Determine the cabinet and shelf location of the card to be removed.

Set faceplate toggle switch to DISABLE.

Disconnect NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCHI cables.

Remove NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCHI card.

Pack and store the card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Install the QPC757 DCH

—End—

Install the QPC757 DCH
Installation procedures for the QPC757 DCHI card are the same for all Large
Systems. These procedures apply to both primary and backup D-channels.
See Figure 38 "QPC757 option and PRI/ISL high-speed programming
switch settings" (page 88) on page 115, Figure 39 "QPC757 option and
PRI/ISL low-speed programming switch settings" (page 89) and Table 27
"D-channel port address switch settings for PRI" (page 89), for option switch
settings per port number of the DCHI card, in Primary Rate Interface mode.
Use Procedure 3 "Install the QPC757 DCHI" (page 87) to install the
QPC757 DCHI card on Large Systems.
Procedure 3
Install the QPC757 DCHI

Step

Action

Determine the cabinet and shelf location of the circuit card to be
installed.
The QPC757 DCHI card can be installed in any slot appropriate
for an I/O port card on a network shelf. For single CPU systems
only, the QPC757 DCHI card can be located on the Common
Equipment (CE) shelf.

Unpack and inspect the card.

Set option switches and jumper plugs on the DCHI card. For PRI
capability, set port J2 to odd. For ISL capability, set port J2 for
high-speed or low-speed programming.

Set faceplate toggle switch to DISABLE.

Install DCHI card into the assigned shelf or module and slot.

Run and connect DCHI cables: connect QPC757 J2 to QPC720
PRI J5 with a QCAD328A cable.

Set faceplate toggle switch to ENABLE.

Enable the loop in LD 60.

Coordinate start-up and verification of the DCHI with the start-up
of the PRI.

Enable the DCHI card using LD 96, command ENL DCH x.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

88 DCH installation

—End—

Figure 38
QPC757 option and PRI/ISL high-speed programming switch settings

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Install the QPC757 DCH

Figure 39
QPC757 option and PRI/ISL low-speed programming switch settings

Port address switch settings
Table 27 "D-channel port address switch settings for PRI" (page 89) shows
the port address switch settings that apply to SW1, SW2 (the D-channel
port), SW3, and SW4.
Table 27
D-channel port address switch settings for PRI
Port Address Switch Settings
Port Number
J1

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4

Off

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

90 DCH installation

D-channel parameter downloading
The system software automatically downloads new parameters to each
D-channel Interface (DCHI) circuit card upon SYSLOAD. When this occurs,
the D-channel is temporarily disabled and then automatically reenabled.
Three situations require manual disabling and enabling of each DCHI to
ensure parameter downloading:
•

Performing a parallel load and switching over to the second CPU

•

Following an alarm condition for the T1 loop carrying the D-channel (but
the D-channel is still operational)

•

Following SYSLOAD when using ISDN Signaling Link (ISL)

Remove the QPC757 DCHI
Use Procedure 4 "Remove the QPC757 DCH" (page 90) to remove the
QPC757 DCHI card from Large Systems.

CAUTION
The QPC757 DCH must be software disabled before it is hardware
disabled to prevent initialization

Procedure 4
Remove the QPC757 DCH

Step

Action

Disable the QPC757 DCHI using LD 96, command DIS DCH x.

Disable asynchronous port J1 in LD 48 to prevent initialization.

Disable loop in LD 60.

If the circuit card is being removed, not replaced, remove data from
memory.

Determine the cabinet and shelf location of the card to be removed.

Set faceplate toggle switch to DISABLE.

Disconnect QPC757 DCHI cables.

Remove QPC757 DCHI card.

Pack and store circuit card.
—End—

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NTBK51 DDCH installation and removal
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
"Introduction" (page 91)
"Install NTBK51 DDCH on NT5D97 dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card" (page 91)
"Remove NTBK51 DDCH from NT5D12 dual-port DTI/PRI" (page 94)

Introduction
This chapter provides installation and removal procedures for the NTBK51
Downloadable D-channel Daughterboard, the NT5D97 dual-port DTI2/PRI2
card, and the NT5D12 dual-port 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card on all Large Systems.
Note: The only version of the NTBK51 DDCH that can be used on an
NT5D97, or NT5D12 installed on a Large System, is the NTBK51AA.
Vintage NTBK51BA cannot be used, due to a different pin configuration
(the NTBK51BA is used on Small Systems.)
Before beginning an installation:
•

Consult the Spares Planning (NN3001-253) document and follow the
instructions.

•

Bring spares of all cables and boards.

•

Remember that test procedures require a 24-hour minimum bit error-rate
testing before being used.

•

Remember that either the DDCH, the MSDL, or NT5D97, or NT5D12
card can be installed first. However, NT5D97 PRI2 loops, and NT5D12
PRI loops, must be configured in software before defining DCH links.

Install NTBK51 DDCH on NT5D97 dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card
Installation procedures for the NTBK51 DDCH are the same for all Large
Systems. Use Procedure 5 "Install the NTBK51 on the NT5D97 dual-port
DTI2/PRI2 card" (page 92) below.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

92 NTBK51 DDCH installation and removal

The DDCH can be mounted on any NT5D97 DDP2 card. Set the address
for the DDCH (see the switch settings section to set the address). If a
DDCH is present on a DDP2 card then an external D-channel should not be
connected to J6. If a DDCH is present the LED "DDCH" lights up.

CAUTION
The static discharge bracelet located inside the cabinet must be
worn before handling circuit cards. Failure to wear the bracelet
can result in damage to the circuit cards.

Procedure 5
Install the NTBK51 on the NT5D97 dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card

Step

Action

Unpack and inspect the DDCH daughterboard.
The DDCH comes with four standoffs so that it can be mounted
onto the NT5D97. These are easily pushed into four corresponding
mounting holes on the DDP2.

Mount the DDCH so that it mates with P1 and P2 on the NT5D97
motherboard.
Note: P 1 and P 2 contain (40+30) sockets as the NTBK51AA
respective pins (40+30), which enables the technician to "mate"
them. This is applicable for the NT5D97AA/AB. The NT5D97AD
has 44+34 sockets. In order to place the NTBK51AA (40+30
pins), place the NTBK51AA inside P1 and P2. Start from their
lower edge. (The remaining "free" sockets (4+4) in P1 and P2
are in their upper edge.)

Set the DDP2 ENB/DIS faceplate switch to Enable (ON). The DDCH
LED then flashes three times.
—End—

Remove NTBK51 DDCH from NT5D97 dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card
Removal procedures for the NTBK51 DDCH are the same for all Large
Systems.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Install NTBK51 DDCH on NT5D12 dual-port DTI/PRI 93

CAUTION
A static discharge bracelet must be worn before handling circuit
cards. Failure to wear the bracelet can result in damage to the
circuit cards.

The NTBK51 can only be removed when it is disabled in software. Both
ports of the associated DDP2 card must be disabled. Follow the steps in
Procedure 6 "Remove the NTBK51 from the NT5D97 dual-port DTI2/PRI2
card" (page 93) to remove the NTBK51 from the NT5D97 dual-port
DTI2/PRI2 card.
Procedure 6
Remove the NTBK51 from the NT5D97 dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card

Step

Action

Set the DDP2 ENB/DIS faceplate switch to Disable (OFF).

Remove the DDP2 and the DDCH.
—End—

Install NTBK51 DDCH on NT5D12 dual-port DTI/PRI
Installation procedures for the NTBK51 DDCH are the same for all Large
Systems.
Set the address for the DDCH (see the switch settings section to set the
address). If a DDCH is present on a DDP card then an external D-channel
should not be connected to J6. If a DDCH is present, the LED "DCH"
lights up.

CAUTION
Service Interruption
A static discharge bracelet must be worn before handling circuit
cards. Failure to wear the bracelet can result in damage to the
circuit cards.

The DDCH can be mounted on any DDP card. Follow the steps in
Procedure 7 "Install the NTBK51 DDCH on the NT5D12 dual-port DTI/PRI"
(page 94) to install the NTBK51 on the NT5D12 dual-port DTI/PRI card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

94 NTBK51 DDCH installation and removal
Procedure 7
Install the NTBK51 DDCH on the NT5D12 dual-port DTI/PRI

Step

Action

Unpack and inspect the DDCH daughterboard.
The DDCH comes with four standoffs so that it can be mounted onto
the DDP. These are easily pushed into four corresponding mounting
holes on the DDP.

Mount the NTBK51 DDCH so that it mates correctly with P1 and P2
on the NT5D12 DDP motherboard.
—End—

Remove NTBK51 DDCH from NT5D12 dual-port DTI/PRI
Removal procedures for the NTBK51 DDCH are the same for all Large
Systems.

CAUTION
A static discharge bracelet must be worn before handling circuit
cards. Failure to wear the bracelet can result in damage to the
circuit cards.

The DDCH can only be removed when it is disabled in software. Both ports
of the associated DDP card must be disabled. Follow the steps in Procedure
8 "Remove the NTBK51 from the NT5D12 dual-port DTI/PRI card" (page
94) to remove the NTBK51 from the NT5D12 dual-port DTI/PRI card.
Procedure 8
Remove the NTBK51 from the NT5D12 dual-port DTI/PRI card

Step

Action

Disable the faceplate switch on the DDP.

Remove the DDP and DDCH.
—End—

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

MSDL installation for all systems
Contents
The section contains information on the following topics:
"Install the MSDL" (page 95)
"Replace the MSDL" (page 98)

Install the MSDL
Installation procedures for the MSDL card are the same for Large Systems.
Use Procedure 9 "Install the MSDL card" (page 95) below. See Figure 40
"MSDL card layout" (page 97), and Table 28 "MSDL switch settings" (page
97) for the port and interface switch settings.
The MSDL card goes into the following slots:
Half Group,
Single Group

CPU/Network Module slot 1–8, 13

Multi Group

Network Module slot 5–14

Refer to Software Input Output Reference — System Messages
(NN43001-712) and Circuit Card Reference (NN43001-311) for more
information.
Procedure 9
Install the MSDL card

Step

Action

Determine module and slot location for the MSDL card. Unpack and
inspect the MSDL card.

Set the MSDL switch settings to correspond to Table 28 "MSDL
switch settings" (page 97), and Figure 40 "MSDL card layout" (page
97).

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

96 MSDL installation for all systems

Insert the MSDL card into the selected card slot of the module
following the card guides.

Connect the appropriate cable between the NT6D80 and the PRI
card MSDL interface.

Enable the MSDL card in LD96.

Unplug the MSDL card and reinsert it. If the red LED still does
not flash three times, leave the card installed for approximately 10
minutes to allow the card to be initialized.

After 10 minutes unplug the card, reinsert it and if the card still does
not flash three times, the card is defective and must be replaced.
—End—

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Install the MSDL

Figure 40
MSDL card layout

Table 28
MSDL switch settings
Port 0—SW4

Port 0—SW8

o
ff

RS-422-A DTE

o
ff

o
n

RS-422-A DCE

o
n

o
ff

RS-232-D

Port 1—SW3
RS-232-D
RS-422-A DTE

Port 1—SW7

o
ff

o
n

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

98 MSDL installation for all systems

o
n

RS-422-A DCE

o
n

o
ff

Port 2—SW2

o
ff

Port 2—SW6

o
ff

RS-422-A DTE

o
ff

o
n

RS-422-A DCE

o
n

o
ff

RS-232-D

Port 3—SW1
RS-232-D

RS-422-A DTE
RS-422-A DCE

Port 3—SW5

o
ff

o
n

o
ff

Replace the MSDL
Replacement procedures for the MSDL card are the same for all Large
Systems. Use Procedure 10 "Replace the MSDL card" (page 98) below.
Procedure 10
Replace the MSDL card

Step

Action

Disable the MSDL card in LD 96.

Disconnect MSDL to PRI cables.

Remove the faulty MSDL card.

Unpack and inspect the new MSDL card.

Set the MSDL switch settings to correspond to Table 28 "MSDL
switch settings" (page 97) and Figure 40 "MSDL card layout" (page
97).

Insert the new MSDL card into the selected card slot of the module
following the card guides.

Observe the red LED on the MSDL faceplate. If it turns on, flashes
three times, and stays on continuously, the MSDL is operating
correctly but is not yet enabled.
If the LED turns on and stays on continuously without flashing
three times, the card can be defective. Go to step 11.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

Replace the MSDL

Connect the appropriate cable between the NT6D80 and the PRI
card MSDL interface.

Enable the MSDL card in LD 96.

Unplug the MSDL card and reinsert it. If the red LED still does
not flash three times, leave the card installed for approximately 10
minutes to allow the card to be initialized.

After 10 minutes unplug the card and reinsert it. If the red LED does
not flash three times, the card is defective and must be replaced.
—End—

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

100 MSDL installation for all systems

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

101

NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card
installation
Contents
The section contains information on the following topics:
"Introduction" (page 101)
"PRI circuit pack locations" (page 101)
"Cable requirements" (page 102)
"Switch settings" (page 120)
"Install NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI cards on Large Systems" (page 123)
"Remove NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI cards from Large Systems" (page 124)
"Install an additional network shelf" (page 125)

Introduction
This chapter contains information on how to install the 2.0 Mb NT8D72 and
the 1.5 Mb QPC720 PRI cards on all Large Systems.
Information on how to install the dual-port cards NT5D97 and NT5D12 is
contained in this document.

PRI circuit pack locations
The PRI circuit pack occupies two adjacent slots on a shelf. As many as
five circuit packs can be plugged into an empty Network shelf, along with a
Power Converter circuit pack. Specific locations will depend on available
space.
Note 1: Due to physical width, Bus Terminating Units (BTUs) and PRIs
cannot fit next to each other on a shelf.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

102 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation

Note 2: This chapter includes instructions for installing an additional
network shelf on a system (when no vacant Network slots are available
to install PRI packs, additional network shelves can replace Intelligent
Peripheral Equipment shelves located on the rear of the Common
Equipment or Disk shelves). Refer to "Install an additional network
shelf" (page 125).

Cable requirements
Shielded 22 AWG (0.644 mm) cables are recommended for connecting
the PRI to the crossconnect point. This cable consists of two twisted-pair
conductors.
The transmit and the receive pairs must be enclosed in a polyvinyl jacket.
This type of cable is commonly referred to as "6-conductor" cable. The
cable should be grounded at the crossconnect point.
In addition to twisted-pair conductors, 75-ohm coaxial cable can also be
used to provide connection to the office repeater or line terminating unit
(LTU).
For manufacture cables of lengths different than those of the standard
cables provided, see "Nonstandard cables" on "Nonstandard cables" (page
295) of this practice.
For the 2.0 Mb NT8D72 PRI card, see Figure 41 "NT8D72(Half Group
cabling) on Half and Single Group systems without an echo canceller"
(page 103), Figure 42 "NT8D72 (Half Group cabling) for Half and Single
Group systems, with an echo canceller" (page 104), Figure 43 "NT8D72
(Single Group cabling) for Half and Single Group systems, without an echo
canceller" (page 105), and Figure 44 "NT8D72 (Single Group cabling) for
Half and Single Group systems, with an echo canceller" (page 106) for Half
Group and Single Group cabling arrangements applying to the system; also,
refer to Table 52 "NTBK51AA DCH switches for NT5D97AD" (page 138).
For the 2.0 NT8D72 on a Multi Group arrangement, see Figure 45 "NT8D72
(Multi Group cabling) for Multi Group systems without an echo canceller"
(page 107) and Figure 46 "NT8D72 (Multi Group cabling) for Multi Group
systems with an echo canceller" (page 108); also refer to Table 30 "Cable
for the NT8D72 PRI card for Multi Group systems" (page 116).
For the 1.5 Mb QPC720 PRI card on Half Group and Single Group systems,
see Figure 47 "QPC720 (Half Group cabling) for Multi Group systems
without an echo canceller" (page 109), Figure 48 "QPC720 (Half Group
cabling) for Multi Group systems with an echo canceller" (page 110), Figure
49 "QPC720 (Single Group cabling) for Multi Group systems without an
echo canceller" (page 111), also, refer to Table 31 "Cable for the QPC720
PRI card for Half and Multi Group systems" (page 117). For the QPC720 on
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Cable requirements

103

Multi Group systems, see Figure 51 "QPC720 Multi Group cabling without
an echo canceller" (page 113) and Figure 52 "QPC720 Multi Group cabling
with an echo canceller" (page 114); also refer to Table 32 "Cable for the
QPC720 PRI card on Multi Group systems" (page 118).
Figure 41
NT8D72(Half Group cabling) on Half and Single Group systems without an echo canceller

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

104 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation
Figure 42
NT8D72 (Half Group cabling) for Half and Single Group systems, with an echo canceller

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Cable requirements

105

Figure 43
NT8D72 (Single Group cabling) for Half and Single Group systems, without an echo canceller

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

106 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation
Figure 44
NT8D72 (Single Group cabling) for Half and Single Group systems, with an echo canceller

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Cable requirements
Figure 45
NT8D72 (Multi Group cabling) for Multi Group systems without an echo canceller

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

107

108 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation
Figure 46
NT8D72 (Multi Group cabling) for Multi Group systems with an echo canceller

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Cable requirements
Figure 47
QPC720 (Half Group cabling) for Multi Group systems without an echo canceller

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

109

110 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation
Figure 48
QPC720 (Half Group cabling) for Multi Group systems with an echo canceller

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Cable requirements
Figure 49
QPC720 (Single Group cabling) for Multi Group systems without an echo canceller

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

111

112 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation
Figure 50
QPC720 (Single Group cabling) for Multi Group systems with an echo canceller

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Cable requirements
Figure 51
QPC720 Multi Group cabling without an echo canceller

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

113

114 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation
Figure 52
QPC720 Multi Group cabling with an echo canceller

Table 29
Cable for the NT8D72 PRI card for Half and Single Group systems
Cable
NTND26

From
PRI card

Des

Con
J5

Des

MSDL

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Con

Cable requirements

Cable

From

Des

Con

Des

Con

115

NT8D79AA

PRI card

Clock contro
ller

CC-0

Only when
primary
clock source.

NT8D79AA

PRI card

Clock contro
ller

CC-0

Only when
secondary
clock source.

For single-group only
NT8D79AA

PRI card

Clock contro
ller

CC-1

Only when
primary
clock source.

NT8D79AA

PRI card

Clock contro
ller

CC-1

Only when
secondary
clock source.

QCAD125

Clock contro
ller

CC-1

Clock Contro
ller back-up.

NT8D85AB

PRI card

Network

QCAD328A

PRI card

DCHI

NTND26

PRI card

MSDL

NT8D7207

PRI card

I/O Panel

RS-232

I/O Panel

RS-232

PRI card

NT8D7205

I/O Panel

CC-0

Run directly
to Network
pack.
J2

Run directly
to DCHI
card.

Echo cancell
er
J6

Echo cancell
er
cross conne
ct

Run via
cabinet I/O
panel to cro
ssconnect
terminal from
switch.

Note: No additional cabling is required for multiple PRIs. The D-channel
is associated through software in LD 17 (prompt PRI).

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

116 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation
Table 30
Cable for the NT8D72 PRI card for Multi Group systems
Cable

From

QCAD130

Des.

Con.

Notes

PRI card

Clock contro
ller

CC-0

QCAD130

PRI card

Clock contro
ller

CC-0

QCAD130

PRI card

Clock contro
ller

CC-1

QCAD130

PRI card

Clock contro
ller

CC-1

QCAD110

Clock contro
ller

CC-0

Junctor
board

JCTR

J11

QCAD110

Clock contro
ller

CC-1

Junctor
board

JCTR

J12

QCAD124

PRI card

Network

QCAD328A

PRI card

DCHI card

NTND26

PRI card

QCAD128

PRI card

QCAD133

I/O Panel

QCAD129

PRI card

RS-232

I/O Panel

RS-232

PRI card

Con.

4
J2

MSDL
J4

I/O Panel

Patch Panel

I/O Panel

Echo Cance
ller
J6

Echo Cance
ller

Note 1: Only when primary clock source.
Note 2: Only when secondary clock source.
Note 3: multigroup junctor board connection.
Note 4: Run to connector on network pack.
Note 5: Run directly to DCHI card.
Note 6: Run by means of cabinet I/O panel to CSU, echo canceller, or cross connect terminal.
Note 7: Run by means of cabinet I/O panel to crossconnect terminal or echo canceller from non
shielded system.
Note 8: No additional cabling is required for multiple PRIs. The D-channel is associated through
software in LD17, prompt PRI.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Cable requirements

Cable

From

QCAD133
RS-232

Des.

Con.

Des.

PRI card

Patch Panel

PRI card

Echo Cance
ller

Con.

117

Notes

Table 31
Cable for the QPC720 PRI card for Half and Multi Group systems
Cable

From

Des.

Con.

Des.

Con.

Comments

For half group only
QCAD130
NT8D79xx

QPC720

QPC471/
QPC775

CC-0

Only when
primary clock
source.

QCAD130
NT8D79xx

QPC720

QPC471/
QPC775

CC-0

Only when
secondary clock
source.

NTND26

QPC720

NT6D80

For single group only
QCAD130
NT8D79xx

QPC720

QPC471/
QPC775

CC-1

Only when
primary clock
source.

QCAD130
NT8D79xx

QPC720

QPC471/
QPC775

CC-1

Only when
secondary clock
source.

QCAD125
NT8D75xx

QPC471/
QPC775

CC-1

Clock controller
back-up.

CC-0

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

118 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation

Cable

From

QCAD124
NT8D85xx

Des.

Con.

QPC720

Network

QCAD328A

QPC720

QPC757

NTND26

QPC720

NT6D80

QCAD133

I/O Panel

QCAD129

QPC720

RS-232

I/O Panel

RS-232

QPC720

Echo Canc
eller

QCAD133
NT8D83xx

QPC720

Patch panel

Des.

Con.

Run directly to
network card.
J2

Patch panel

Comments

Run directly to
DCHI card.

Run via cabinet
I/O panel to
CSU, Echo
Canceller, or
cross connect
terminal.

I/O Panel
Echo Canc
eller

Run via cabinet
I/O panel to
crossconnect
terminal or Echo
Canceller from
non-shielded
system.

Table 32
Cable for the QPC720 PRI card on Multi Group systems
Cable

From

QCAD130
NT8D79xx

Des.

Con.

Notes

QPC720

QPC47
1
QCP77
5

CC-0

Only when
primary clock
source

QCAD130
NT8D79xx

QPC720

QPC47
1
QCP77
5

CC-0

Only when
secondary clock
source

QCAD130
NT8D79xx

QPC720

QPC47
1
QCP77
5

CC-1

Only when
primary clock
source

Con.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Cable requirements

Cable

From

Des.

QCAD130
NT8D79xx

QPC720

QCAD110
NT8D74xx

QPC471
QCP775

CC-0

QCAD110
NT8D74xx

QPC471
QCP775

CC-1

QCAD124
NT8D85xx

Des.

Con.

Notes

QPC47
1
QCP77
5

CC-1

Only when
secondary clock
source

QPC417

JCTR

J11

multigroup
junctor board
connection

QPC417

JCTR

J12

QPC720

Network

QCAD328

QPC720

QPC757

NTND26

QPC720

NT6D80

QCAD128
NT8D83xx

QPC720

I/O
Panel

Run via cabinet
I/O panel to
CSU, Echo
Canceller, or
crossconnect
terminal

QCAD133
NT8D83xx

I/O
Panel

Patch
Panel

Run via cabinet
I/O panel to
CSU, Echo
Canceller, or
crossconnect
terminal

QCAD129
NT9J93xx

QPC720

I/O
Panel

Run via cabinet
I/O panel to
CSU, Echo
Canceller, or
crossconnect
terminal

RS-232

I/OPanel

RS-232

QPC720

Con.

Run to connec
tor on network
pack
J2

Run directly to
DCHI card

Echo
Canceller
J6

Echo
Canceller

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
.

119

Run via cabinet
I/O panel to
Echo Canceller
or crossconnect
terminal from
non-shielded
system

120 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation

Cable

From

QCAD133
NT8D83xx

RS-232

Des.

Con.

Des.

QPC720

Patch Panel

Run via cabinet
I/O panel to
Echo Canceller
or crossconnect
terminal from
non-shielded
system

QPC720

Echo
Canceller

Run via cabinet
I/O panel to
Echo Canceller
or crossconnect
terminal from
non-shielded
system

Con.

Notes

Switch settings
Figure 53 "NT8D72AA, NT8D72AB, NT8D72BA PRI DIP switch settings
for Large Systems" (page 121) shows the NT8D72AA, NT8D72AB, and
NT8D72BA PRI DIP switch settings for Large Systems. Figure 54 "QPC720
switch settings for Half and Single Group systems" (page 122) shows the
QPC720 PRI switch settings for Large Systems.
Table 33 "NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI transmission equalization switch
settings for Large Systems" (page 122) indicates the Transmission
equalization switch settings for the NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI cards for
Large Systems.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Switch settings 121
Figure 53
NT8D72AA, NT8D72AB, NT8D72BA PRI DIP switch settings for Large Systems

Note: For EuroISDN applications, use the default setting (120 ohms).

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

122 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation
Figure 54
QPC720 switch settings for Half and Single Group systems

Table 33
NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI transmission equalization switch settings for Large Systems
Switch S2 settings

To repeater facility

To crossconnect point

5 on

0 - 45 m
(0 - 150 ft)

0 - 30 m
(0 - 100 ft)

2, 4, 6 on

46 - 135 m
(151 - 450 ft)

31 - 100 m
(101 - 355 ft)

1, 3, 7 on

136 - 225 m
(451 - 750 ft)

101 - 200 m
(356 - 655 ft)

Switch 3 options for PRI with ESF
SW3-1

on = extended superframe format (ESF)
off = superframe format (SF)

Note 1: All positions on S2 (location B22) are OFF except as shown under the column labeled
"Switch S2 settings." The 8-pole SW3 (location E37) positions are OFF except for SW3-1 as shown
for "Switch 3 option for DTI with ESF."
Note 2: For D2, D3, or D4 framing formats (superframe formats), set all SW3 options to OFF.
Note 3: For the DTI with ESF option, you must set the framing format as ESF with the DLOP prompt
in LD17 before you set SW3-1 on the card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Install NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI cards on Large Systems

123

Install NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI cards on Large Systems
Use Procedure 11 "Install the NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI on Large Systems"
(page 123) to install the NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI cards on Large Systems.
Procedure 11
Install the NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI on Large Systems

Step

Action

Determine the cabinet and shelf location of the circuit card to be
installed. The following slots can be used if they are not required
for other cards.

Table 34
Shelf and slot location of NT8D72 and QPC720 for Half Group and Single Group systems
System

Shelf

Slot

Half Group,
Single Group

NT6D39 CPU/NET

3–8 Note 1
18 Note 3

NT8D35 DTI Exp Cube

2–3 Note 1
5–14 Note 1

NT8D47 RPE Cube

1, 11, 12

Core

0-3

Network Module

5–10,
13–14

Multi Group

Note 1: DTI/PRI packs require two slots. The slot indicated is the maximum slot that the pack
resides in. For example, the slot 14 pack uses slots 13 and 14.
Note 2: The DTI/PRI pack cannot be installed in slot 11. The pack would come in contact with the
BTU installed between slots 11 and 12.
Note 3: Slot 18 is only available on CPU shelf, which has no MDU/FDU.
Note 4: DTI/PRI pack could reside in slots 10 and 11, but cannot reside in slots 11 and 12 because
of powering restrictions.

Unpack and inspect the PRI cards.

Set the option switches on the PRI circuit cards.

Install the PRI circuit card in the assigned shelf and slot.

Install the network circuit card (if no network loop connection is
available).

If required, install I/O adapters in the I/O panel.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

124 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation

Run and connect the PRI cables.

If required, install connecting blocks at MDF or wall-mounted
crossconnect terminal.

If required, designate connecting blocks at MDF or wall-mounted
crossconnect terminal.

If required, install CSU or Echo Canceller.

Crossconnect PRI circuits.

Add related office data into system memory. Refer to the work order.

Run PRI verification tests.
—End—

Remove NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI cards from Large Systems
UseProcedure 12 " " (page 124) to remove the NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI
cards from Large Systems.
Procedure 12

Step

Action

Disable the D-channel in LD 96.

Disable Network Loop using LD 60. The command is DISL x.

Remove the data from memory if the circuit card is being completely
removed, not replaced.

Determine the location of the circuit cards to be removed.

Remove cross connections at MDF to wall-mounted crossconnect
terminal.

Disconnect PRI cables at Echo Canceller and at carrier interface (for
example, Office Repeater and NCTE equipment).

Tag and disconnect cables from card. Rearrange Clock Controller
card cables if required. This will affect call processing on DTI/PRI
loops.

Remove PRI and network circuit cards. If the other circuit of a dual
network card is in use, DO NOT remove the network card.

Pack and store circuit card.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

Install an additional network shelf

125

—End—

Install an additional network shelf
Use Procedure 13 "Install an additional network shelf on Half Group and
Single Group systems" (page 125) to install an additional network shelf,
when additional shelf space is required for PRI cards on Half Group and
Single Group systems. A QUD15 cooling unit is required for each additional
shelf installed.

CAUTION
Do not place the circuit packs in the shelf until Step 7 is completed.

Procedure 13
Install an additional network shelf on Half Group and Single Group systems

Step

Action

Determine the cabinet and shelf location of the Network shelf to
be installed.

Unpack and inspect the shelf.

Remove the existing left or right rear Intelligent Peripheral Equipment
(IPE) shelf (if required).

Install the additional Network shelf in the IPE (Step 3) location.

Install a QUD15 cooling unit directly below the Network shelf and
secure with four mounting screws.

Install and connect the QCAD172A power cable to the added
QUD15 cooling unit as follows:

•

If the added QUD15 is located below the left Network shelf,
unplug the C11 connector from the QCAD111 power harness
that connects to the existing left side QUD15.

•

If the added QUD15 is located below the right Network shelf,
unplug the C21 connector from the QCAD111 power harness
instead of the C11.

Plug the C11 or C21 connector into the single-ended connector of
the QCAD172A power cable.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

126 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation

Plug one of the two connectors at the other end of the C11 or C21
connector that was removed.

Plug the remaining connector of the QCAD172A power cable into
the added QUD15.

Adjust the QCAD111 power wiring harness, untie and then connect:

•

the C17 power connection cable to the right rear Network shelf

•

the C19 power connection cable to the left rear Network shelf

Install PRI trunks and enter related shelf and PRI office data into
switch memory.
—End—

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

127

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 installation
and removal
Contents
The section contains information on the following topics:
"Introduction" (page 127)
"NT5D97 circuit card locations" (page 127)
"Port definitions" (page 128)
"Case Scenarios for replacing a digital trunk NT8D72BA, QPC536E, or
NTCK43 by a DDP2 card" (page 128)
"NT5D97AA/AB DIP switch settings" (page 129)
"Install the NT5D97 DDP2" (page 139)
"Remove the NT5D97 DDP2" (page 140)
"Configure the NT5D97 DDP2" (page 141)

Introduction
This section contains information required to install the NT5D97 Dual-port
DTI2/PRI2 (DDP2) card on Large Systems.
For installation and removal procedures for the NTBK51AA Downloadable
D-channel daughterboard, prefer to the section "NTBK51 DDCH installation
and removal" (page 91).

NT5D97 circuit card locations
Each NT5D97 card requires one slot on a shelf. NT5D97 cards can be
placed in any card slot in the network bus.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

128 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 installation and removal

Port definitions
Since the NT5D97 card is a dual-card, it equips two ports; these ports can
be defined in the following combinations:
Table 35
NT5D97AA/AB loops configuration
Loop 0

Loop
1

not configured

DTI2

PRI2

not configured

DTI2

PRI2

Table 36
NT5D97AD loops configuration
Loop 0

Loop 1

not configured

DTI2

PRI2

DDCS

not configured

DTI2

PRI2

DDCS

Note: Each loop DPNSS can be defined in Normal or Extended
addressing mode.

Case Scenarios for replacing a digital trunk NT8D72BA, QPC536E,
or NTCK43 by a DDP2 card
The following discussion describes possible scenarios when replacing a
digital trunk NT8D72BA PRI2 card or QPC536E DTI2 card or NTCK43 Dual
PRI card configuration with a NT5D97 DDP2 card configuration.
Case 1 - The two ports of a QPC414 network card are connected to two
digital trunks.
In this case, the QPC414 and the two digital trunks are replaced by a single
DDP2 card, which is plugged into the network shelf in the QPC414 slot.
Case 2 - One port of the QPC414 card is connected to a digital trunk, and
the second is connected to a peripheral buffer. Both cards are in a network
loop location.
In this case, the QPC414 should not be removed. The digital trunk is
removed and the DDP2 card is plugged into one of the two empty slots.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D97AA/AB DIP switch settings 129

Case 3 - The network shelf is full, one port of a QPC414 network card is
connected to a digital trunk, and the second is connected to a peripheral
buffer. This arrangement is repeated for another QPC414. The digital trunks
are located in a shelf that provides only power.
In this case, the peripheral buffers will have to be reassigned, so that each
pair of buffers will use both ports of the same QPC414 card. The other
QPC414 card can then be replaced by the NT5D97 DDP2.
Note: If an NT8D72BA/NTCK43 card is being replaced by a DDP2
card, the D-channel Handler can be reconnected to the DDP2 card, or
removed if an onboard NTBK51DDCH card is used. Also, DIP Switches
in the NT5D97 must be set properly before insertion. NT5D97 has a
different DIP Switch setting from NTCK43AB. Refer to "NT5D97AA/AB
DIP switch settings" (page 129) for DIP switch setting).

NT5D97AA/AB DIP switch settings
The NT5D97 DDP2 card is equipped with 6x2 sets of DIP switches for
trunk parameters settings for port0 and port1 respectively. Additionally,
the DDP2 card is equipped with one set of four DIP switches for the Ring
Ground setting. The NT5D97AA/AB has one set of eight DIP switches and
NT5D97AD has two sets of ten DIP switches for the D-channel Handler
parameters setting.
The DIP switches are used for the setting of default values of certain
parameters. Firmware reads the general purpose switches, which sets the
default values accordingly.
Table 37
DIP switch settings for NT5D97AA/AB
Trunks
Port 0
0 and 1

Trunk 0

Trunk 1

S10

S11

S12

S13

Receiver Interface

S14

General Purpose

S15

Card
ENB/DSB
mounted on the face plate
Ring Ground

Port 1

S1
S2

MSDL

Tx Mode

LBO Setting

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

130 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 installation and removal
Figure 55
DIP switches for NT5D97AA/AB

The following parameters are set by DIP switches. The boldface font shows
the factory setup.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D97AA/AB DIP switch settings 131

Trunk interface switches for NT5D97AA/AB
Impedance level and unit mode
The S9/S15 switch selects the impedance level and loop operation mode on
DEI2 OR PRI2. Refer to Table 38 "Impedance level and loop mode switch
settings" (page 131).
Table 38
Impedance level and loop mode switch settings
Switch

Description

S9/S15 Switch Setting

Impedance level

OFF - 120 ohm
ON - 75 ohm

Spare

Unit mode

OFF - Loop operates in the DTI2 mode
ON - Loop operates in the PRI2 mode

Transmission mode
A per-trunk switch (S4/S10) provides a selection of the digital trunk interface
type. Refer to Table 39 "Impedance level and loop mode switch settings"
(page 131).
Table 39
Impedance level and loop mode switch settings
Description

S4/S10 switch settings

OFF

Not used

Line build out
A per-trunk set of three switches (S5/S11, S6/S12 and S7/S13) provides
the dB value for the line build out. Refer to Table 40 "Trunk interface line
build out switch settings" (page 131).
Note: Do not change this setup.
Table 40
Trunk interface line build out switch settings
Description

0dB

Switch setting
S5/S11

S6/S12

S7/S13

OFF

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

132 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 installation and removal

Receiver impedance
A per-trunk set of four DIP switches (S8/S14 provides selection between
75 or 120 ohm values. Refer toTable 41 "Trunk interface impedance switch
settings" (page 132).
Table 41
Trunk interface impedance switch settings
Description

S8/S14 switch setting

75 ohm

OFF

120 ohm

OFF

Ring ground switches for NT5D97AA/AB
A set of four DIP switches (S2) selects which Ring lines are connected to
the ground. Refer to Table 48 "LBO switches for NT5D97AD" (page 136).
Table 42
Ring ground switch settings
Switch

Description

S2 switch settings

Trunk 0 Transit

OFF-Ring line is not grounded
ON- Ring line is grounded

Trunk 0 Receive

OFF-Ring line is not grounded
ON- Ring line is grounded

Trunk 1 Transmit

OFF-Ring line is not grounded
ON- Ring line is grounded

Trunk 1 Receive

OFF-Ring line is not grounded
ON- Ring line is grounded

DCH Address select switch for NTBK51AA daughter board for
NT5D97AA/AB
In case of an onboard NTBK51AA D-channel daughterboard, a set of four
switches (S3) provide the daughterboard address. Refer to Table 50 "Trunk
1 switches" (page 137).
Note: Switch 8 of S3 (S3-8) does not require a switch setting to
select between the onboard NTBK51AA D-channel daughterboard
and an external DCHI/MSDL. The NT5D97 detects when the onboard
NTBK51AA D-channel daughterboard is used.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D97AA/AB DIP switch settings 133
Table 43
DCH mode and address switch settings
Switch

Description

S3 switch setting

1-4

D-channel daughterboard address

See table

5-8

For future use

OFF

Table 51 "Ring ground switch for NT5D97AD" (page 137) shows the possible
selections of the NTBK51AA D-channel.
Table 44
NTBK51AA daughterboard addressselect switch settings
Device
Address

Switch Setting

OFF

Note 1: The system contains a maximum number of 16 DCHI, MSDL, and DDCH devices. The
Device Addresses are equivalent to the MSDL DNUM designations.
Note 2: Device address 0 is commonly assigned to the System TTYD Monitor.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

134 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 installation and removal

NT5D97AD DIP switch settings
The NT5D97 DDP2 card is equipped with 6x2 sets of DIP switches for
trunk parameters settings for port 0 and port 1 respectively. Additionally,
the DDP2 card is equipped with one set of four DIP switches for the Ring
Ground setting. The NT5D97AA/AB has one set of eight DIP switches and
NT5D97AD has two sets of ten DIP switches for the D-channel Handler
parameters setting.
The DIP switches are used for the setting of default values of certain
parameters. Firmware reads the general purpose switches, which sets the
default values accordingly
Table 45
DIP switch settings for NT5D97AD
Trunks
Port 0
0 and 1

Trunk 0

Trunk 1

S10

S13

S14

S15

Receiver Interface

S11

General Purpose

S12

Card
ENB/DSB mounted on the face
plate
Ring Ground

Port 1

S1
S16

DPNSS

MSDL

S9
S9

TX Mode

LBO Setting

Refer to DIP switch locations in Figure 56 "Dip switches locations for
NT5D97AD" (page 135).

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D97AD DIP switch settings 135
Figure 56
Dip switches locations for NT5D97AD

The following parameters are set by DIP switches. The boldface font shows
the factory setup.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

136 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 installation and removal

Trunk interface switches for NT5D97AD
Trunk 0 switches
Switch S12 gives the MPU information about its environment as shown in
Table 46 "General purpose switches for NT5D97AD" (page 136).
Table 46
General purpose switches for NT5D97AD
Switch

Description

S9/S15 Switch Setting

S12_1

Impedance level

OFF - 120 ohm
ON - 75 ohm

S12_2

Spare

For future use

S12_3

Spare

For future use

S12_4

Unit mode

OFF - Unit operates in the DTI2 mode
ON - Unit operates in the PRI2 mode

Switch S2 selects the Transmission mode as shown in Table 47 "TX mode
switches for NT5D97AD" (page 136).
Table 47
TX mode switches for NT5D97AD
TX mode

OFF

Not used

Switch S3, S4, and S5 select LBO function as is Table 48 "LBO switches
for NT5D97AD" (page 136).
Table 48
LBO switches for NT5D97AD
LBO setting

0dB

OFF

7.5dB

OFF

15dB

OFF

Switch S6 selects the Receiver interface as in Table 49 "Receiver interface
switches for NT5D97AD" (page 137).

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D97AD DIP switch settings 137
Table 49
Receiver interface switches for NT5D97AD
Impedance

S6-1

S6-2

S6-3

S6-4

75 ohm

OFF

120 ohm

OFF

Trunk 1 switches for NT5D97AD
Table 50
Trunk 1 switches
Switch

Function

General Purpose...See Table 46 "General purpose
switches for NT5D97AD" (page 136)

S10

TX Mode...See Table 47 "TX mode switches for NT5D97AD"
(page 136)

S13, S14 & S15

LBO...See Table 48 "LBO switches for NT5D97AD" (page
136)

S11

RX Impedance...See Table 49 "Receiver interface switches
for NT5D97AD" (page 137)

Ring ground switches for NT5D97AD
Switch S16 selects which ring lines connect to ground. When set to ON,
the ring line is grounded as shown in Table 51 "Ring ground switch for
NT5D97AD" (page 137).
Table 51
Ring ground switch for NT5D97AD
Switch

Line

S16_1

Trunk 0 Transmit

S16_2

Trunk 0 Receive

S16_3

Trunk 1 Transmit

S16_4

Trunk 1 Receive

DCH Address select switch for NTBK51AA daughter board for
NT5D97AD
Switch S9 selects the NTBK51AA DCH daughterboard address.
Switch S8 is not used when the NTBK51AA daughterboard is used.
S8_1-10 can be set to OFF position as in Table 52 "NTBK51AA DCH
switches for NT5D97AD" (page 138).

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

138 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 installation and removal
Table 52
NTBK51AA DCH switches for NT5D97AD
Switch number

Function

S9_1-4

DCH daughter card address

S9_5-8

Set to OFF

S9_9

Set to ON (NTBK51AA Mode)

S9_10

Set to ON (NTBK51AA Mode)

MSDL external card
Table 53 "Switch settings for MSDL external card" (page 138) lists the switch
numbers assigned for future use on the MSDL external card.
Table 53
Switch settings for MSDL external card
Switch number

Function

S9_1-10

For future use

S8_1-10

For future use

Use Table 54 "Switch setting for MSDL external card" (page 138) to set
the card address.
Table 54
Switch setting for MSDL external card
Switch Setting
DNUM (LD 17)

OFF

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Install the NT5D97 DDP2

139

Switch Setting
DNUM (LD 17)

OFF

Install the NT5D97 DDP2
Use Procedure 14 "Install the NT5D97 on Large Systems" (page 139) to
install the NT5D97 on Large Systems.

CAUTION
The static discharge bracelet located inside the cabinet must be
worn before handling circuit cards. Failure to wear the bracelet
can result in damage to the circuit cards.

Procedure 14
Install the NT5D97 on Large Systems

Step

Action

Determine the cabinet and shelf location where the NT5D97 is to
be installed. The NT5D97 can be installed in any card slot in the
Network bus.

Unpack and inspect the NT5D97and cables.

If a DDCH is installed, refer to the section "NTBK51 DDCH
installation and removal" (page 91).

Set the option switches on the NT5D97 card before installation.
Refer to "NT5D97AA/AB DIP switch settings" (page 129).
The ENB/DIS (enable/disable faceplate switch) must be OFF (DIS)
when installing the NT5D97, otherwise a system initialize can occur.
The ENB/DIS on the NT5D97 corresponds to the faceplate switch
on the QPC414 Network card.

Install NT5D97 card in the assigned shelf and slot.

Set the ENB/DIS faceplate switch to ON.
If the DDCH is installed, the DDCH LED should flash three times.

If required, install the I/O adapters in the I/O panel.

Run and connect the NT5D97 cables

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

140 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 installation and removal

CAUTION
Clock Controller cables connecting the Clock Controller
and NT5D97 card must NOT be routed through the center
of the cabinet past the power harness. Instead they should
be routed around the outside of the equipment shelves.

If required, install connecting blocks at the MDF or wall mounted
crossconnect terminal.

If required, designate connecting blocks at the MDF or wall mounted
crossconnect terminal.

If required, install a Network Channel Terminating Equipment
(NCTE). or Line Terminating Unit (LTU).

Add related office data into switch memory.

Enable faceplate switch S1. This is the "Loop Enable" switch.
The faceplate LEDs should go on for 4 seconds then go off and
the OOS, DIS and ACT LEDs should go on again and stay on.
IF DDCH is installed, the DCH LED should flash 3 times.

Run the PRI/DTI Verification Test.

Run the PRI status check.
—End—

Remove the NT5D97 DDP2
Use Procedure 15 "Remove the NT5D97 from Large Systems" (page
141) to remove the NT5D97 from Large Systems

CAUTION
The static discharge bracelet located inside the cabinet must be
worn before handling circuit cards. Failure to wear the bracelet
can result in damage to the circuit cards.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Configure the NT5D97 DDP2

141

Procedure 15
Remove the NT5D97 from Large Systems

Step

Action

Determine the cabinet and shelf location of the NT5D97 card to
be removed.

Disable the Network Loop using LD 60. The command is DISL
"loop number."
The associated DCHI might have to be disabled first. The faceplate
switch ENB/DIS should not be disabled until both PRI2/DTI2 loops
are disabled first.

Remove data from memory, if the NT5D97 card is being completely
removed, not replaced.

Remove cross connections at the MDF to wall-mounted crossconnect
terminal.

Tag and disconnect cables from the card.

Rearrange Clock Controller cables if required.

CAUTION
Clock Controller cables connecting the Clock Controller
and DDP2 card must NOT be routed through the center of
the cabinet past the power harness. Instead, they should
be routed around the outside of the equipment shelves.

Remove the DDP2 card only if both loops are disabled. If the other
circuit of a DDP2 card is in use, DO NOT remove the card. The
Faceplate switch ENB/DIS must be in the OFF (DIS) position before
the card is removed, otherwise the system will initialize.

Pack and store the NT5D97 card and circuit card.
—End—

Configure the NT5D97 DDP2
After the NT5D97 DDP2 is installed, configure the system using the same
procedures as the standard NT8D72BA PRI2.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

142 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 installation and removal

Consider the following when configuring the NT5D97 DDP2 card:
•

The system software allows four ports to be defined for the NT6D80
MSDL. The DDCH (NTBK51AA) card has only two ports, 0 and 1;
therefore, ports 2 and 3 must not be defined when using the NTBK51AA.

•

Port 0 of the NTBK51AA can only be defined to work with Loop 0 of the
NT5D97 DDP2 card, and Port 1 of the NTBK51AA can only be defined
to work with Loop 1 of the NT5D97. This relationship must be reflected
when configuring a new DCH in LD 17 (in response to the DCHL prompt,
enter either 0 or 1 when specifying the loop number used by the DCH).

•

You cannot define one of the DDP2 loops for the NTBK51AA DDCH,
and the other loop for the NT6D11AF, NT5K75AA, and NT5K35AA DCH
card or the NT6D80 MSDL.

•

When configuring the NT5D97 DDP2 in DTI2 outgoing dial pulse mode,
a Digit Outpulsing patch is required.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

143

NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI card
installation
Contents
The section contains information on the following topics:
"Introduction" (page 143)
"NT5D12 circuit card locations" (page 143)
"Port definitions" (page 144)
"Scenarios for replacement of a digital trunk card (QPC720/QPC472) by a DDP
card" (page 144)
"NT5D12 switch settings" (page 145)
"General Purpose Switches" (page 145)
"Trunk interface switches" (page 145)
"Ring ground switches" (page 146)
"DCH mode and address select switches" (page 147)
"Install the NT5D12 DDP" (page 150)
"Remove the NT5D12 DDP" (page 152)
"Configure the NT5D12 DDP" (page 153)

Introduction
This section contains information required to install the NT5D12 1.5 Mb
DTI/PRI Dual-port (DDP) card on Large Systems.
For installation and removal procedures for the NTBK51AA Downloadable
D-channel daughterboard, refer to the section "NTBK51 DDCH installation
and removal" (page 91).

NT5D12 circuit card locations
Each NT5D12 circuit card requires one slot on a shelf. NT5D12 cards can
be placed in any card slot in the network bus, subject to the cautionary
note below.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

144 NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI card installation

Port definitions
Since the NT5D12 card is dual-card, it equips two ports. These ports are
defined in the following combinations:
Port 0

Port 1

DTI

PRI

DTI

PRI

DTI

Not configured

PRI

Not configured

PRI

Not configured

DTI

Scenarios for replacement of a digital trunk card (QPC720/QPC472)
by a DDP card
The following discussion describes possible scenarios when replacing a
digital trunk QPC720 PRI card or QPC472 DTI card configuration with a
NT5D12 DDP card configuration.
Case 1 - The two ports of a QPC414 network card are connected to two
digital trunks.
In this case, the QPC414 and the two digital trunks are replaced by a single
DDP card, which is plugged into the CE shelf in the QPC414 slot.
Case 2 - One port of the QPC414 card is connected to a digital trunk,
and the second is connected to a peripheral buffer. Both cards are in the
network loop location.
In this case, the QPC414 should not be removed. The digital trunk is
removed and the DDP card is plugged into one of the two empty slots.
Case 3 - The CE shelf is full, one port of a QPC414 network card is
connected to a digital trunk, and the second is connected to a peripheral
buffer. This arrangement is repeated for another QPC414. The digital trunks
are located in a shelf that provides only power.
In this case, the peripheral buffers will have to be reassigned, so that each
pair of buffers will use both ports of the same QPC414 card. The other
QPC414 card can then be replaced by the NT5D12 DDP.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D12 switch settings 145

Note in all cases - If a QPC720 card is being replaced by a DDP card, the
D-channel Handler or MSDL can be either reconnected to the DDP card, or
removed if an onboard NTBK51AA DDCH card is used.

NT5D12 switch settings
The NT5D12 card is equipped with 6x2 sets of DIP switches for trunk
parameters settings for port0 and port1 respectively. Additionally, the
NT5D12 card is equipped with one set of four DIP switches for the Ring
Ground setting and one set of eight DIP switches for the D-channel Handler
parameters setting.
The DIP switches are used for setting of default values of certain
parameters. The general purpose switches are read by the firmware which
sets the default values accordingly.
The following parameters are being set by the DIP switches. Factory setups
are shown in bold.

General Purpose Switches
A per-trunk set of four DIP switches provides the default setting for
operational modes. Switch set S9 is used for Trunk 0. Switch set S15 is used
for Trunk 1. Refer to Table 55 "General purpose switch settings" (page 145)’.
Table 55
General purpose switch settings
Switch

Description

S9/S15 Switch Setting

Framing Mode

OFF - ESF
ON - SF

Yellow Alarm Method

OFF - FDL
ON - Digit2

Zero Code Suppression
Mode

OFF - B8ZS

Unused

OFF

ON - AMI

Trunk interface switches
Transmission Mode
A per-trunk switch provides selection for T1 transmission. See Table 56
"Trunk interface transmission mode switch settings" (page 146).

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

146 NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI card installation
Table 56
Trunk interface transmission mode switch settings
Description

S4/S10 Switch Setting

For future use.

OFF

Line Build Out
A per-trunk set of three switches provides a selection between 0, 7.5 or 15
dB values. See Table 57 "Trunk interface line build out switch settings"
(page 146).
Table 57
Trunk interface line build out switch settings
Description

Switch Setting
S5/S11

S6/S12

S7/S13

0 dB

OFF

7.5 dB

OFF

15 dB

OFF

Receiver Impedance
A per trunk set of four DIP switches provides a selection between 75, 100
or 120 values. See Table 58 "Trunk interface receiver impedance switch
settings" (page 146).
Table 58
Trunk interface receiver impedance switch settings
Description

S8/S14 Switch Setting

OFF

100

OFF

120

OFF

Ring ground switches
A set of four DIP switches selects which Ring lines are connected to the
ground. See Table 59 "Ring ground switch settings" (page 147).

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D12 switch settings 147
Table 59
Ring ground switch settings
Switch

Description

S2 Switch Setting

Trunk 0 Transmit

OFF - Ring line is not grounded
ON - Ring line is grounded

Trunk 0 Receive

OFF - Ring line is not grounded
ON - Ring line is grounded

Trunk 1 Transmit

OFF - Ring line is not grounded
ON - Ring line is grounded

Trunk 1 Receive

OFF - Ring line is not grounded
ON - Ring line is grounded

DCH mode and address select switches
A set of eight DIP switches selects between an onboard NTBK51AA
D-channel daughterboard and an external MSDL/DCHI card. In the case
of an onboard NTBK51AA D-channel daughterboard, four of the switches
provide the daughterboard address. See Table 60 "DCH mode and address
select switch settings" (page 147).
Table 60
DCH mode and address select switch settings
Switch

Description

S3 Switch Setting

1-4

D-channel daughterb
oard
Address

See Table 61 "NTBK51AA daughterboard
address select switch settings" (page 148)

5-7

For future use.

OFF

External DCH or
Onboard DDCH

OFF - MSDL or DCHI card
ON - Onboard DDCH daughterboard

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

148 NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI card installation
Table 61
NTBK51AA daughterboard address select switch settings
Device
Address1

Switch Setting

OFF

Note 1: The maximum number of DCHI, MSDL, and DDCH devices in the system is 16.
Note 1: The Device Addresses are equivalent to the MSDL DNUM designations.
Note 2: Device address 0 is commonly assigned to the System Monitor.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NT5D12 switch settings 149
Figure 57
Switch functional areas on the NT5D12

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

150 NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI card installation
Figure 58
NT5D12 switch default settings

Install the NT5D12 DDP
Use Procedure 16 "Install the NT5D12 on Large Systems" (page 151) to
install the NT5D12 on Large Systems.

CAUTION
The static discharge bracelet located inside the cabinet must be
worn before handling circuit cards. Failure to wear the bracelet
can result in damage to the circuit cards.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Install the NT5D12 DDP 151
Procedure 16
Install the NT5D12 on Large Systems

Step

Action

Determine the cabinet and shelf location where the NT5D12 card is
to be installed. The NT5D12 can be installed in any card slot in the
Network bus, subject to the cautionary note below.

CAUTION
Some installed-based systems can have a Bus
Terminating Unit (BTU) already installed. This can
interfere with a selected NT5D12 card location. In such
cases, the NT5D12 should be installed in an alternate
network bus card slot location.

Unpack and inspect circuit cards and cables.

If a DDCH is to be installed, refer to "NTBK51 DDCH installation
and removal" (page 91).

Set the option switches on the NT5D12 circuit card before
installation. Refer to "NTBK51 DDCH installation and removal"
(page 91).
S1 (faceplate switch) must be OFF (DIS) when installing the
NT5D12. S1 on the NT5D12 corresponds to the faceplate switch
on the QPC414 Network card.

Install the NT5D12 circuit card in the assigned shelf and slot.

Add related office administration data into the system memory.

If required, install the I/O adapters in the I/O panel.

Run and connect the NT5D12 cables.

CAUTION
Clock Controller cables connecting the Clock Controller
and NT5D12 card must NOT be routed through the center
of the cabinet past the power harness. Instead, route
them around the outside of the equipment shelves.

If required, install connecting blocks at the MDF or wall mounted
crossconnect terminal.

If required, designate connecting blocks at the MDF or wall mounted
crossconnect terminal.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

152 NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI card installation

If required, install Network Channel Terminating Equipment (NCTE).

Enable faceplate switch S1. This is the "Loop Enable" switch.
The faceplate LEDs should go on for 4 seconds then go off and the
OOS, DIS and ACT LEDs should go on again and stay on.
IF DDCH is installed, the DCH LED should flash 3 times.

Run PRI/DTI Verification Test.

Run PRI status check.
—End—

Remove the NT5D12 DDP
Use Procedure 17 "Remove the NT5D12 DDP" (page 152) to remove the
NT5D12 from Large Systems.

CAUTION
A static discharge bracelet must be worn before handling circuit
cards. Failure to wear the bracelet can result in damage to the
circuit cards.

Procedure 17
Remove the NT5D12 DDP

Step

Action

Determine the cabinet and shelf location of the NT5D12 card to
be removed.

Disable Network Loop using LD 60. The command is DISL "loop
number."
The associated DCHI might have to be disabled first. The faceplate
switch S1 should not be disabled until both PRI loops are disabled
first.

Remove data from memory, if the NT5D12 card is being completely
removed, not replaced.

Remove cross connections at the MDF to wall-mounted crossconnect
terminal.

Tag and disconnect cables from card.

Rearrange Clock Controller cables if required.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

Configure the NT5D12 DDP 153

CAUTION
Clock Controller cables connecting the Clock Controller
and NT5D12 card must NOT be routed through the center
of the cabinet past the power harness. Instead they should
be routed around the outside of the equipment shelves.

Determine if the other circuit of a NT5D12 card is in use.DO NOT
remove the card if in use.

Remove the NT5D12 card only if both loops are disabled. Switch
S1 (faceplate switch) must be in the OFF (DIS) position before the
card is removed.

Pack and store the NT5D12 card and circuit card.
—End—

Configure the NT5D12 DDP
After the NT5D12 DDP has been installed, it can be configured using the
same procedures as for the standard QPC720 PRI card.
Consider the following when configuring the NT5D12 DDP card:
•

The system software allows four ports to be defined for the NT6D80
MSDL. The DDCH (NTBK51AA) card has only two ports, 0 and 1;
therefore, ports 2 and 3 must not be defined when using the NTBK51AA.

•

Port 0 of the NTBK51AA can only be defined to work with Loop 0 of the
NT5D12 DDP card, and Port 1 of the NTBK51AA can only be defined
to work with Loop 1 of the NT5D12. This relationship must be reflected
when configuring a new DCH in LD 17 (in response to the DCHL prompt,
enter either 0 or 1 when specifying the loop number used by the DCH).

•

You cannot define one of the NT5D12 loops for the NTBK51AA DDCH,
and the other loop for the QPC757 DCHI or the NT6D80 MSDL.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

154 NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI card installation

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

155

Clock Controller description and
installation
Contents
The section contains information on the following topics:
"Introduction" (page 156)
"Description" (page 156)
"Need for synchronization" (page 156)
"Supported Clock Controllers" (page 157)
"Synchronization methods" (page 158)
"Hierarchical synchronization" (page 159)
"Stratum levels" (page 160)
"Frame slip" (page 160)
"Guidelines" (page 161)
"Modes of operation" (page 167)
"Small System Clock Controller daughterboard" (page 168)
"Installation procedures" (page 168)
"Determine slots and shelves" (page 168)
"Set switches" (page 169)
"Start the Clock Controller" (page 171)
"Clock Controller commands" (page 171)
"Install or replace a Clock Controller on a Half Group and Single Group
system" (page 171)
"Install or replace a Clock Controller on a Single Group and Multi Group
System" (page 173)
"Upgrade to an NTRB53 Clock Controller on a Single Group and Multi Group
System" (page 175)

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

156 Clock Controller description and installation

Introduction
This chapter introduces the NTRB53 Clock Controller, and provides
procedures on how to install this clock controller on Large Systems.
The NTRB53 Clock Controller replaces the QPC471H and QPC775F in
new systems. QPC471H and QPC775F Clock Controllers continue to be
supported.
Note: The NTRB53 Clock Controller cannot be combined with a
QPC775 or a QPC471 card in one system
The illustrations used in the description section depict a Small System.
However, the system can also be representative of a Large System.

Description
This section provides an overview on the use of clock controllers. For Large
Systems, the following clock controllers are supported:
•

NTRB53

•

QPC471

•

QPC775
Note: Clock controllers cannot be mixed in one system.

The NTRB53 Clock Controller is available for all markets. The QPC471
Clock Controller is available for U.S. markets. Vintages A through G of the
QPC471 Clock Controller can be used in one system; vintage H of QPC471
Clock Controllers cannot be mixed with clock controllers of other vintages.
The QPC775E Clock Controller card is available for only Canadian and
International markets.

Need for synchronization
Digital trunking requires synchronized clocking so that a shift in one clock
source will result in an equivalent shift of the same size and direction in all
parts of the network.
When digital signals are being transported over a communication link,
the receiving end must operate at the same frequency (data rate) as
the originating end to prevent loss of information. This is referred to
as link synchronization. If both ends of a communication link are not
in synchronization, data bit slips occur and therefore a loss of data
results. In general, accurate timing is very important, but more importantly
synchronized timing is a must for reliable data transfer.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Description

157

When only two switches are interconnected, synchronization can be
achieved by operating the two systems in a master/slave mode whereby one
system derives its timing from the other. However, in a network of digital
systems, slips can be better prevented by forcing all digital systems to use
a common reference clock (see Figure 59 "Hierarchical Synchronization"
(page 159)).

Supported Clock Controllers
For Large Systems, the following clock controllers are supported:
•

NTRB53

•

QPC471

•

QPC775

NTRB53 Clock Controller
The NTRB53 Clock Controller is a replacement for the QPC471 and
QPC775 Clock Controllers. The NTRB53 clock controller retains existing
functionality.
Software configuration of the clock remains unchanged. A PSDL object
allows field upgrades of the clock’s firmware. Overlay changes allow for
force download and status checking. Support for the IDC command and
hardware inventory are also included.
System Initialization During system initialization, the system software will
verify if the clock controllers equipped in the system are the downloadable
clock controllers (NTRB53) or not. If the clock controllers are identified as
the downloadable clock controller cards, then both downloadable clock
controller cards will be checked for the software version number they are
running with. This is compared with the version number of the PSDL file
stored in the system software database.
If there is a mismatch between the two version numbers and the system
database has the higher version number, the card will be put in the PSDL
downloading tree. Once the entry is added in the PSDL tree, the preprocess
step is done. The next step is for the system to initiate the downloading in
the background, using the PSDL tree. As soon as the download complete
message is received from the card, the CPU sends a message to reset the
clock controller card so that it boots with the new software. Once a self-test
is complete the core sends an enable base message to enable the card.
Maintenance Overlays Downloading can be initiated from LD 60 for the
inactive clock controller card as part of the enabling sequence of the card. A
download can be forced by specifying the optional parameter FDL (Force
Download) when enabling the card. At the prompt, enter:

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

158 Clock Controller description and installation

ENL CC x FDL

Enable Clock in side x with the force download option

If the optional parameter is not specified, then downloading is conditional.
This means that the version number of the loadware on the clock controller
card will be checked against the version number stored on the system disk.
If a mismatch is found and the version number in the system software
database is higher, then downloading will be initiated for that card. The entry
for the card is not added to the PSDL tree at this time. Instead, downloading
is initiated on a single card and only that card will be allowed to perform
the force download option.

QPC471 and QPC775 Clock Controllers
Clock Controllers QPC471 and QPC775 will continue to function with:
•

CS 1000M HG systems

•

CS 1000M SG systems

•

CS 1000M MG systems
Note: "Description" (page 156) for market and application availability
information.

Synchronization methods
There are two common methods of operation for maintaining timing
coordination between switching systems, Plesiosynchronous and
Mesosynchronous.

Plesiosynchronous operation
In a Plesiosynchronous operation, nodal clocks run independently (free run)
at the same nominal frequency. There are frequency differences between
clocks resulting in frame slips (see "Frame slip" (page 160).) The magnitude
of frame slips are directly proportional to the frequency difference. Slips are
inevitable but can be minimized by using very stable clocks and elastic
stores or buffers. These buffers are capable of absorbing a certain number
of data bits to compensate for slight variances in clock frequencies.

Mesosynchronous operation
In a Mesosynchronous operation, nodal clocks are continuously and
automatically locked to an external reference clock. With this method, frame
slips can be eliminated if elastic stores are large enough to compensate for
transmission variances. Mesosynchronous operation is virtually slip free.
Whenever possible the system uses the Mesosynchronous mode of
operation by using the clock controller circuit cards to lock onto an external
reference source (such as the Central Office, another PBX, and so on).
This statement is true unless the system is used as a Master in an
independent/private network (no digital links to a higher Node Category).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Description

159

In an isolated private network, the clock controller can operate in free run
mode and act as a master clock to be tracked by other PBX systems in
the private network.

Hierarchical synchronization
Figure 59 "Hierarchical Synchronization" (page 159) provides a general
view of the Digital Network Clock Synchronization including the four stratum
level Node Categories. Stratum 1 being the most accurate and Stratum 4
being the least accurate. System clocking meets Node Category E Stratum
4 requirements. Also shown are ways of providing a Secondary Clock
Source while preventing timing loops.
Figure 59
Hierarchical Synchronization

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

160 Clock Controller description and installation

Stratum levels
In a digital network, nodes are synchronized using a priority master/slave
method. Digital nodes are ranked in Stratum levels 1 to 5. Each node is
synchronized to the highest ranking node in its neighborhood with which it
has a direct link. Refer to Table 62 "Node categories and stratum levels"
(page 160).
Table 62
Node categories and stratum levels
Stratum 2

Stratum 3

Stratum 4

Accuracy

+/- 1.6 * 10-8 Hz

+/- 4.6 * 10-6 Hz

+/- 3.2 * 10-5 Hz

Holdover

1 * 10-10 per day

<= 255 frame slips in
1st 24 hours

Not Required

Hardware Duplication

Required

Required (Note 1)

Not Required

MTIE During
Rearrangement

MTIE <= 1 usec Phase
Change Slope: <= 81
ns in any 1.326 msec

No Requirement (Note
2)

Pull-in Range

+/- 1.6 * 10-8 Hz

+/- 4.6 * 10-6 Hz

+/- 3.2 * 10-5 Hz

Dedicated Timing
Required

Required

Not required

Note 1: Non-duplicated clock hardware that meets all other stratum 3
requirements is referred to as stratum 3ND.
Note 2: Stratum 4 clock hardware that meets MTIE requirements during
rearrangements is referred to as 4E.

Frame slip
Digital signals must have accurate clock synchronization for data to
be interleaved into or extracted from the appropriate timeslot during
multiplexing and demultiplexing operations. A Frame Slip is defined (for 2
Mbyte links) as the repetition of, or deletion of the 256 data bits of a CEPT
frame due to a sufficiently large discrepancy in the read and write rates at
the buffer (clocks are not operating at exactly the same speed).
When data bits are written into (added to) a buffer at a slightly higher rate
than that at which they are being read (emptied), sooner or later the buffer
overflows This is a slip-frame deletion.
In the opposite situation, when data bits are written (added) into a buffer
at slightly lower rate than that at which they are being read (emptied),
eventually the buffer runs dry or underflows. This is also a slip-frame
repetition.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Description

161

A 1.5 Mbyte PRI contains a buffer large enough to hold about 2 full DS-1
frames (193 x 2 = 386). A 2 Mbyte PRI contains a buffer large enough to
contain 2 full frames (256 x 2 = 512 bits). The buffer is normally kept half
full (1 frame).
Slippage has impact on the data being transferred, as is shown in Table 63
"Performance impact of one slip on service type" (page 161). All of the
degradations shown in the table can be controlled or avoided with proper
clock synchronization.
Table 63
Performance impact of one slip on service type
Service

Potential Impact

Encrypted Text

Encryption key must be resent.

Video

Freeze frame for several seconds. Loud pop
on audio.

Digital Data

Deletion or repetition of data. Possible
misframe.

Facsimile

Deletion of 4 to 8 scan lines. Dropped call.

Voice Band Data

Transmission Errors for 0.01 to 2 s. Dropped
call.

Voice

Possible click.

Guidelines
Some key points to keep in mind when designing Network Synchronization:
•

Where possible, the Master Clock Source should always be from a Node
Category/Stratum with higher clock accuracy, that is, a PBX connected to
the Central Office (CO.) The CO is the Master and the PBX is the Slave.

•

The source should not be in free-run itself (providing its own clock)
unless it is operating in a fully independent network where the source
acts as a Master (see "Plesiosynchronous operation" (page 158).)

•

When connecting two PBXs together (no CO connections), the most
reliable PBX should be the Master. Reliability here refers to Dual
CPU/Dual Clock, battery back-up or stratum level of the clock controller.

•

Avoid timing loops. A timing loop occurs when a clock using as its
reference frequency a signal that it itself traceable to the output of that
clock. The formation of such a closed timing loop leads to frequency
instability and is not permitted. Timing loops are sometimes unavoidable
on the secondary clock reference source.

•

Ensure all CO/PBX links used as clock references have a traceable path
back to the same stratum 1 clock source.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

162 Clock Controller description and installation

While it is beyond the scope of this discussion to provide detailed Network
Synchronization, the following examples illustrate some of the basic
concepts to achieve stable clocking.
Figure 60
Example 1, Isolated Private Network

In this example, there is no digital connection to the Central Office.
Figure 61
Example 2, Isolated Private Network with Secondary Reference Clock

In this example, there is no digital connection to the Central Office. For tie
lines between PBXs facilitated by a central office, clocking is derived from
the PBX, not the CO. When a second Digital loop is available, it can be used
as a Secondary Clock source in case the Primary Source fails.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Description

163

Figure 62
Example 3, Clocking Hierarchy referenced to a Public Network Master Clock

This is an example of a "STAR" arrangement— one Hub PBX is linked to
the Central Office and all other PBXs are connected as slaves. When a
second Digital loop from the system which forms the hub of this network
becomes available, it can be used as a Secondary Clock Source in case the
Primary Source fails.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

164 Clock Controller description and installation
Figure 63
Example 4, Alternate Clocking from the same CO

In this case, a digital connection to the Central Office can exist (i.e. Loops X
and Y). When a second Digital loop from the CO or Master M-1 becomes
available, it can be used as a Secondary Clock Source in case the Primary
Source fails.
To avoid timing loops, in example 4-4 the most reliable slave system should
not have a Secondary Clock Source (SREF= ). In this example, this is
illustrated by the node which supports loops X and Z.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Description

165

Figure 64
Example 5, digital connection to the CO

In this example, digital connections to the Central Office do exist. When a
second Digital loop from the CO becomes available, it can be used as a
Secondary Clock Source in case the Primary Source fails.
Slaves can track on each other as a secondary source since the chances of
both links to the Central Offices going down at the same time are minimal.
All Central Offices must have a path back to the same stratum 1 source.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

166 Clock Controller description and installation
Figure 65
Example 6, Complex Isolated Private Network

Digital connections to the Central Office do not exist in this example. If it
does, the PBX connected to it will track off the CO and will in turn be used
as a clock source to other nodes.
When a second Digital loop from the Master system becomes available, it
can be used as a Secondary Clock Source in case the Primary Source fails.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Description

167

Figure 66
Example 7, Network Clocking with MUX

In this example, the direct connection to the CO (without a MUX) should be
used as a primary clock reference because this is where the least amount of
hardware is involved. The MUX must pass the clock and not generate its
own clock; in other words, it must be a slave (not Free Run). Synchronized
clocking is required.

Modes of operation
There are two modes of operation, tracking mode and free run (non-tracking)
mode.

Tracking mode
In tracking mode, the Primary Rate Interface (PRI) or Digital Trunk Interface
(DTI) loop supplies an external clock reference to the onboard clock
controller. Two PRI or DTI packs can operate in tracking mode, with one
defined as the primary reference source for clock synchronization, the other
defined as a secondary reference source. The secondary reference acts as
a back-up to the primary reference.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

168 Clock Controller description and installation

Free run (non-tracking) mode
The clock synchronization for a PRI loop can operate in free-run mode if:
•

the loop is not defined as the primary or secondary clock reference

•

the primary and secondary references are disabled

•

the primary and secondary references are in a local alarm state

Small System Clock Controller daughterboard
The Small System supports a single onboard clock controller daughterboard,
the NTAK20, located on either:
•

the NTRB21 1.5 Mbyte DTI/PRI card

•

the NTAK09 1.5 DTI/PRI card

•

the NTAK10 2 Mbyte DTI card

•

the NTAK79 2 Mbyte PRI card

•

the NTBK50 2 Mbyte PRI card

The clock controller circuitry synchronizes to an external reference clock and
generates and distributes the clock to the system. This enables the system
to function either as a slave to an external clock or as a clocking master.
Note: When configuring ISL over analog trunks, clock controllers are
not required.

Installation procedures
This section provides procedures on how to install a clock controller on
Large Systems.

CAUTION
Do not deviate from the procedures described in this section. Call
processing can stop if procedural steps are not followed properly.

Determine slots and shelves
Table 64 "Clock Controller shelves and slots" (page 169) shows the systems,
the shelves and available slots.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Installation procedures

169

Table 64
Clock Controller shelves and slots
System

Shelf

Slot(s)

Half Group,
Single Group

NT6D39 CPU/NET

Multi Group

NTDA35 Network Module

Set switches
Before installing a clock controller, set the switches as shown in Table 65
"Clock Controller switch settings for QPC471 vintage H" (page 169), Table
66 "Clock Controller switch settings for QPC775" (page 170), and Table 67
"Clock Controller switch settings for NTRB53" (page 170). Table 65 "Clock
Controller switch settings for QPC471 vintage H" (page 169) displays the
settings for different vintages of the QPC471. Table 66 "Clock Controller
switch settings for QPC775" (page 170) shows the settings for the QPC775.
Table 67 "Clock Controller switch settings for NTRB53" (page 170) shows
settings for the NTRB53.
Table 65
Clock Controller switch settings for QPC471 vintage H
SW1
System

SW2

SW4

Half Group, Single Group

off

Option 81

off

Multi Group (with the exception of
Option 81)

off

Multi Group with Fiber Network

off

If there is only one clock controller card in the system, set to OFF. If there are two clock
controller cards, determine the total cable length between the J3 connectors (no single cable
can exceed 25 ft.) and set these two switch positions for this cable length, as shown above. The
maximum total (combined) length is 50 ft. Set the switches on both cards to the same settings.

Set to ON for clock controller 0. Set to OFF for clock controller 1.

Note: FNF based-systems the total clock path length is equal to the length of the NTRC49 cable
used to connect between the two clock controller cards.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

170 Clock Controller description and installation

SW1
System

SW2

SW4
4

0–4.3 m (0–14 ft)

off

4.6–6.1 m (15–20 ft)

off

6.4–10.1 m (21–33 ft)

off

10.4–15.2 m (34–50 ft)

*Cable length between the
J3 faceplate connectors:

Set to ON for clock controller 0. Set to OFF for clock controller 1.

Note: FNF based-systems the total clock path length is equal to the length of the NTRC49 cable
used to connect between the two clock controller cards.
Table 66
Clock Controller switch settings for QPC775
System

SW2

SW3

SW4

Half Group, Single Group

OFF

Multi Group

OFF

Table 67
Clock Controller switch settings for NTRB53
Side Number

Multigroup/

Machine

Faceplate

Single group

Type # 1

Cable Length

Machine
Type #2

(CC to CC)
1

Multigroup

Off

5
0-14 ft

Side 0 = On

81 = Off

Side 1 = Off

51, 51C

61, 51C, 61C
= Off
Single group =
On

71, 81, 81C
= On

61, 61C, 81C =
On
Off

15-20 ft

Off

21-33 ft

34-50 ft

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Installation procedures

171

Note: Switches 7 and 8 are not used.

Start the Clock Controller
The clock controller, when first enabled, is in free run mode. It stays in this
mode for several minutes before being switched to tracking mode. Manual
mode setting is possible using LD 60.
All clock controllers begin tracking within approximately 15 minutes.

Clock Controller commands
During the installation procedure you will use some of the clock controller
commands available in LD 39 and LD 60. Refer to Software Input Output
Reference — Maintenance (NN43001-711).

LD 39 commands with the NTRB53 Clock Controller
Command

Description

DIS SCG x

Disable SCG card x (0 or 1).
Not applicable for NTRB53 Clock Controller. Use LD 60 instead.

ENL SCG x

Enable SCG x (0 or 1).
Not applicable for NTRB53 Clock Controller. Use LD 60 instead.

SCLK

Switch clock to other SCG.
Functions with NTRB53 Clock Controller

STAT SCG x

Print status of SCG x (0 or 1).
Prints normal status of NTRB53 (not full status)

Install or replace a Clock Controller on a Half Group and Single Group
system
Procedure 18 "Install a clock controller for Half Group and Single Group
Systems." (page 171) outlines the steps to install a clock controller on Half
Group and Single Group systems.
Procedure 18
Install a clock controller for Half Group and Single Group Systems.

Step

Action

Unpack and inspect the circuit card.

Determine the cabinet and shelf location. Refer to Table 64 "Clock
Controller shelves and slots" (page 169).

Set the clock controller switch. Refer to Table 65 "Clock Controller
switch settings for QPC471 vintage H" (page 169), Table 66 "Clock
Controller switch settings for QPC775" (page 170), or Table 67
"Clock Controller switch settings for NTRB53" (page 170).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

172 Clock Controller description and installation

Set the ENL/DIS toggle switch to DIS (disable).

Replacing a clock controller, do the following:
•

Perform a status check on the clock with the SSCK command in
LD 60. The new controller should have the same status.
Note: ERR20 messages can be generated. These can usually
be ignored. However, excessive clock switching should be
avoided, especially when counters are near the maintenance
or out-of-service thresholds. Excessive switching could
generate threshold-exceeded messages or cause the PRI to
be automatically disabled. Check the counters in LD 60. If
necessary, reset the counters using the RCNT command.

a. Set the old card’s faceplate ENL/DIS switch to DIS.
b. Disconnect the cables from the old clock controller card and
remove the card from the shelf.
6

Adjust the 3PE switches to recognize the clock controller card.

Set faceplate ENL/DIS switch to DIS.

Install the clock controller in the selected slot.

Run and connect cables
a. Connect the primary reference to J2.
b. If available, connect the secondary reference to J1.
c. Connect the cable between the two clocks to J3 on each
controller card.

Set the faceplate ENL/DIS switch to ENL.
Note: Verify that the faceplate LED flashes three times to ensure
the clock controller self test passed.

Enable the clock controller by entering ENL CC x in LD 60.

Set the error detection thresholds and clock synchronization controls
in LD 73. (Optional with card replacement; required with new
installation.)

Track on a primary or secondary reference clock, use LD 60. Use
the following command:

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Installation procedures

TRCK

PCK

(for primary)

SCLK

(for secondary)

FRUN

(for free-run)

173

Issue the status check command, SSCK.
Note: In order for the clock enhancement feature in the clock
controller (NTRB53) to be fully functional, the user must issue a
manual INI to activate the clock enhancement feature.
—End—

Install or replace a Clock Controller on a Single Group and Multi Group
System
Procedure 19 "Install a Clock Controller on a Single Group and Multi Group
System" (page 173) outlines the steps to install a clock controller on Single
Group and Multi Group systems.
Procedure 19
Install a Clock Controller on a Single Group and Multi Group System

Step

Action

Unpack and inspect the circuit card.

Determine the cabinet and shelf location. Refer to Table 64 "Clock
Controller shelves and slots" (page 169).

Set the ENL/DIS toggle switch to DIS (disable).

If replacing a clock controller, do the following:
•

Perform a status check on the clock with the SSCK command in
LD 60. The new controller should have the same status.

•

Use LD 135 to STAT the CPU and switch if necessary

•

Disable the old card using LD 60.
Note 1: Do not disable an active clock or a clock associated
with an active CPU.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

174 Clock Controller description and installation

Note 2: ERR20 messages can be generated. These can
usually be ignored. However, excessive clock switching should
be avoided, especially when counters are near the maintenance
or out-of-service thresholds. Excessive switching could
generate threshold-exceeded messages or cause the PRI to
be automatically disabled. Check the counters in LD 60. If
necessary, reset the counters using the RCNT command.
a. Set the old card’s faceplate ENL/DIS switch to DIS.
b. Disconnect the cables from the old clock controller card and
remove it from the shelf.
6

Install the new clock controller in the selected slot.

Run and connect the cables
a. Connect the primary reference to J2.
b. Connect the secondary reference to J, if available.
c. Connect the cable from J3 on each controller card to the junctor
group connector.

Set the faceplate ENL/DIS switch to ENL.

Execute the ENL CC X command in LD 60. The faceplate LED
should go to the OFF state.

Set the error detection thresholds and clock synchronization controls
in LD 73. (Optional if replacing card; required with new installation.)

Track on a primary or secondary reference clock, use LD 60. The
command follows:
TRCK

PCK

(for primary)

SCLK

(for secondary)

FRUN

(for free-run)

Issue the status check command, SSCK.

(Optional) Wait two minutes before activating the newly installed
clock controller with the LD 60 SWCK command.
Note: This allows a smooth transition of the clock controller
upgrade.

Repeat for the second clock controller, if necessary.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

Installation procedures

175

Upgrade to an NTRB53 Clock Controller on a Single Group and Multi
Group System
Follow these procedures to replace the existing clock controller with the
NTRB53 Clock Controller on Large Systems.
Note: The NTRB53 Clock Controller cannot be combined with a
QPC775 or a QPC471 card in one system.
Procedure 20
Remove old equipment

Step

Action

Ensure the clock controller card being removed for dual core
systems is on the inactive core. If you need to switch cores go to
LD 135 and enter:
LD 135

SCPU

Switch cores

****

Exit the overlay

Disable the QPC775 or QPC471 Clock Controller card. At the
prompt, enter:
LD 60

Load the program

SSCK x

Get status of system clock where x = 0 or 1

Switch clocks if the clock is active at the prompt, enter:
SWCK

Switch system clock from active to standby

SSCK x

Get status of system clock where x = 0 or 1

Ensure the other clock controller is active and in the free run mode. At
the prompt, enter:

SSCK x

Get status of system clock where x = 0 or 1

TRCK
FRUN

Set clock controller tracking to free run

Disable the clock controller card you are removing. At the prompt,
enter:
DIS CC x

Disable system clock controller where x = 0 or 1

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

176 Clock Controller description and installation

Set the ENL/DIS switch to DIS on the card you are removing.

Tag and disconnect the cables to the card you are removing.

Unhook the locking devices on the card and pull it out of the card
cage.
—End—

Follow these procedures to install new equipment with Clock Controller on
Large Systems.
Procedure 21
Installing new equipment

Step

Action

Set the ENB/DIS switch to DIS on the replacement card.

Set the option switches on the replacement card (NTRB53). Refer to
Table 67 "Clock Controller switch settings for NTRB53" (page 170).

Insert the replacement card into the vacated slot and hook the
locking devices.

Connect the reference cables (J1 and J2) to the replacement card.

CAUTION
Clock-to-Clock cable J3 should never be connected
between the old clock (QPC471 or QPC775) and the new
clock (NTRB53).

Set the ENB/DIS switch to ENB on the replacement card.

Software enable the card. At the prompt, enter
LD 60
ENL CC x

Enable clock controller card, where x = 0 or 1

Verify that the card is active. At the prompt, enter:
SSCK x

Get status of system clock where x = 0 or 1

****

Exit the overlay

Switch to the core with the new clock. At the prompt, enter:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

Installation procedures

177

LD 135
SCPU

Switch CPU

Note: Wait two minutes before proceeding to the next step.

CAUTION
The following procedure to faceplate disable the active
clock controller could impact service.

Disable the faceplate of the active clock controller to force the newly
installed clock controller to activate.

Disconnect the Clock-to-Clock faceplate cable to J3 of the new clock
controller card in the active CPU side

CAUTION
Active calls will experience noise over local and trunk calls

Verify that the clock controller is active. At the prompt, enter
LD 60
SSCK

Get status of the new system clock, where x = 0 or 1

TRCK PCK

Track primary clock, where x = 0 or 1

RCNT

Resets all alarm counters of all digital cards

****

Exit the overlay

Note: Replacing the clock controller will generate errors on the
network equipment. It is recommended that all counters be reset.
12

Replace the remaining QPC775 or QPC471 clock controller card,
tag and disconnect the cables to the card you are removing.

Unhook the locking devices on the card and pull it out of the card
cage.

Set the ENB/DIS switch to DIS on the replacement card.

Set the option switches on the replacement card (NTRB53). Refer to
Table 67 "Clock Controller switch settings for NTRB53" (page 170).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

178 Clock Controller description and installation

Insert the replacement card into the selected slot and hook the
locking devices.

Connect the reference cables (J1 and J2) and the clock-to-clock
cable (J3) to the replacement card.

Set the ENB/DIS switch to ENB on the replacement card.

Disable the software and enable the card. At the prompt, enter:
LD 60

DID CC x

Disable clock controller card, where x=0 or 1

ENL CC x

Enable clock controller card, where x=0 or 1

Verify that the card is active. At the prompt, enter:
SSCK x

Get status of system clock, where x=0 or 1

****

Exit the overlay

Note: Wait two minutes before proceeding to next step.
21

Activate the new card and verify that it is active. At the prompt enter:
LD60
SWCK

Switch system clock from active to standby

SSCK x

Get status of system clock, where x = 0 or 1

TRCK PCK

Track primary clock, where x = 0 or 1

RCNT

Reset alarm counters of all digital cards

****

Exit the overlay

Set the clock source to the status it was in before the replacement
procedure.

Verify clock switchover and tracking. At the prompt, enter:
SWCK

Switch system clock from active to standby

SSCK x

Get status of system clock, where x = 0 or 1

****

Exit the overlay

—End—

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

179

ISL installation
Contents
The section contains information on the following topics:
"ISL configurations" (page 179)
"DCHI switch settings" (page 180)
"MSDL switch settings" (page 181)
"Shared mode" (page 179)
"Dedicated mode using leased line" (page 183)
"Dedicated mode using dialup modem" (page 184)
"Install a modem for ISL applications" (page 184)
"Dedicated mode using PRI/DTI trunks" (page 186)
"QMT11 switch settings" (page 187)
"QMT8 switch settings" (page 188)
"QMT21C switch settings" (page 188)
"ISL installation" (page 189)
"Install ISL in dedicated mode (digital and analog)" (page 189)
"Install ISL in shared mode" (page 189)

ISL configurations
The ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) is used on PRI/DTI connections. The ISL
feature operates in two modes, shared and dedicated.

Shared mode
The DCHI supports ISDN PRI signaling for both PRI and ISL trunks.

Dedicated mode
In this mode, the DCHI supports ISL trunks using ISDN PRI signaling. The
D-channel communicates with the far end using a dedicated leased line,
dialup modem, or DTI trunk.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

180 ISL installation

DCHI switch settings
For ISL functions, use the following switch settings for the J2 port:
•

RS-232 for 19.2 Kbps and below

•

HS (RS-422) for speeds above 19.2 Kbps

•

External clock (in LD 17) provided by modem, ADM, or ASIM, otherwise
DCHI will be running at 64 Kbps

•

DTE device configuration

Figure 67 "NT6D11AB, NT6D11AD DCHI with ISL high-speed programming
jumper settings" (page 180) shows the ISL high-speed programming jumper
settings for the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE DCHI, and Figure 68 "NT6D11AB,
NT6D11AD DCHI with ISL low-speed programming jumper settings"
(page 181) shows the ISL low-speed programming jumper settings for the
NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE/AF DCHI.
Figure 67
NT6D11AB, NT6D11AD DCHI with ISL high-speed programming jumper settings

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

MSDL switch settings 181
Figure 68
NT6D11AB, NT6D11AD DCHI with ISL low-speed programming jumper settings

MSDL switch settings
For ISL functions, use the following switch settings.
•

DTE for high speed programming;

•

RS-232 for 19.2 Kbps and below;

•

External clock (in LD17) provided by modem, ADM, or ASIM, HSDM:
otherwise, DCH runs at 64 Kbps. Refer to Figure 69 "MSDL/ISL
settings" (page 182).

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

182 ISL installation
Figure 69
MSDL/ISL settings

Shared mode
In shared mode, the D-channel is provided by the DCHI or MSDL card and
PRI. The hardware configuration is basically the same as the ISDN PRI
D-channel. See Figure 70 "ISL in shared mode" (page 183).
Shared mode is established through service change in LD17, prompt USR,
with the response SHA.
In the shared mode, the DCH can share signaling for no more than 382 (T1)
or 480 (E1) trunks, including digital and analog.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Dedicated mode using leased line 183
Figure 70
ISL in shared mode

Dedicated mode using leased line
In this configuration, the D-channel connects the DCHI or MSDL to a
modem which communicates with a far-end modem over a dedicated leased
line. See Figure 71 "ISL dedicated mode, using leased line" (page 183). A
2400 baud D-channel can support signaling for approximately 382 (T1) or
480 (E1) trunks without non-call associated messages.
Both modems should be set in the synchronous mode.
Figure 71
ISL dedicated mode, using leased line

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

184 ISL installation

Dedicated mode using dialup modem
In this configuration, the DCHI or MSDL is connected to a modem which is
connected to a 500 set line card. See Figure 73 "ISL dedicated mode, using
dialup Hayes Smartmodem 2400" (page 186). The call is connected to the
far end through the analog (500/2500 type set) -to-TIE trunk path.
To set up the D-channel, program the modem at one end in the autodial
mode, so it automatically initiates a call to the other end at power up. The
autodial DN must be coordinated with personnel at the far end switch.

Install a modem for ISL applications
The modem software and hardware must be installed sequentially. The
modem software must be defined before the hardware connection between
the modem and the system can be made. Within the software installation,
either the autodial or the auto-answer software can be set up first. Figure
72 "ISL dedicated mode: using dialup Hayes Smartmodem 2400" (page
184) shows the hardware configuration between two PBXs and their
corresponding modems.
Figure 72
ISL dedicated mode: using dialup Hayes Smartmodem 2400

Examples of parameters used for actual auto-answer and autodial sites are
shown in the following tables (note that the Hayes Smartmodem has been
used.) Table 68 "Active and stored profiles of the autodial or originating
modem" (page 185) shows the active and stored profiles of the autodial site
(or the originating modem). Table 69 "Active and stored profiles of the auto
answer or terminating modem" (page 185) shows the active and stored
profiles of the auto-answer site (or the terminating modem). The Hayes
Smartmodem User Guide contains explanations of the parameters used in

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Dedicated mode using dialup modem

185

Table 68 "Active and stored profiles of the autodial or originating modem"
(page 185) and Table 69 "Active and stored profiles of the auto answer
or terminating modem" (page 185).
After the software parameters have been set up, the JP1 jumpers behind
the front faceplate of the Hayes Smartmodem must be dumb strapped on
both modems. Next, see the Hayes Smartmodem Getting Started Guide to
set up the hardware between the system and the modem.
Table 68
Active and stored profiles of the autodial or originating modem
Active profile:
B1 E0 L2 M1 Q1 V1 X4 Y0 &C1 &D0 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q2 &R0 &S0 &X0 &Y0
S00:000 S01:000 S02:043 S03:013 S04:010 S05:008 S06:002 S07:030
S08:002 S09:006 S10:014 S12:050 S14:ACH S16:00H S18:000 S21:20H
S22:76H S23:15H S25:005 S26:001 S27:42H
Stored profile 0:
B1 E0 L2 M1 Q1 V1 X4 Y0 &C1 &D0 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q2 &R0 &S0 &X0
S00:000 S14:ACH S18:000 S21:20H S22:76H S23:17H S25:005 S26:001
S27:42H
Stored profile 1:
B1 E1 L2 M1 Q0 V1 X4 Y0 &C0 &D0 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q0 &R0 &S0 &X0
S00:00 S14:AAH S18:000 S21:00H S22:76H S23:17H S25:005 S26:001
S27:40H
Telephone numbers:
&Z0=ATDT7414011
&Z1=
&Z2=
&Z3=
Table 69
Active and stored profiles of the auto answer or terminating modem
Active profile:
B1 E0 L2 M1 Q1 V1 X4 Y0 &C1 &D2 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q1 &R0 &S1 &X2 &Y0
S00:001 S01:000 S02:043 S03:013 S04:010 S05:008 S06:002 S07:030
S08:002 S09:006 S10:014 S12:050 S14:ACH S16:00H S18:000 S21:70H
S22:76H S23:15H S25:005 S26:001 S27:61H
Stored profile 0:
B1 E0 L2 M1 Q1 V1 X4 Y0 &C1 &D2 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q1 &R0 &S1 &X2
S00:001 S14:ACH S18:000 S21:70H S22:76H S23:17H S25:005 S26:001
S27:61H
Stored profile 1:

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

186 ISL installation

B1 E1 L2 M1 Q0 V1 X4 Y0 &C0 &D0 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q0 &R0 &S0 &X0
S00:000 S14:AAH S18:000 S21:00H S22:76H S23:17H S25:005 S26:001
S27:40H
Telephone numbers:
&Z0=
&Z1=
&Z2=
&Z3=
Figure 73
ISL dedicated mode, using dialup Hayes Smartmodem 2400

Dedicated mode using PRI/DTI trunks
In this configuration, the DCHI or MSDL is connected to a High Speed Data
Module (HSDM) or Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module (ASIM).
See Figure 74 "ISL dedicated mode: using PRI/DTI trunk" (page 187). The
HSDM or ASIM is connected to a Data Line Card (DLC). The call is then
connected to the far end through the DLC to DTI trunk path.
To establish the D-channel in this configuration, set up the HSDM or ASIM
at one end in hot line mode. The hot line DN must be coordinated with
personnel at the far end, then programmed in LD11. The preprogrammed
hot line DN is dialed by the system. If the call cannot be established, the
system continues to dial the hot line number continuously until the call is
connected.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Dedicated mode using dialup modem

187

Set the HSDM or ASIM must be in synchronous mode. A data rate of 9.6
Kbps is recommended because it provides internal error detection and
correction. The following data rates are also supported: 1.2 Kbps, 2.4 Kbps,
3.6 Kbps, 4.8 Kbps, 7.2 Kbps, 14.4 Kbps, 19.2 Kbps, 38.4 Kbps, and 56
Kbps for ASIM. The High Speed Data Module (HSDM) supports 64 Kbps.
Note 1: This configuration is the least reliable due to the lockup
problems inherent in Smart Modems from power splices and noisy lines.
To increase the reliability on this configuration, a constant power source
can be used when powering the modems. Also ensure that the TIE
lines meet data grade specifications.
Note 2: Nortel takes no responsibility for ISL D-channel outages due to
modem lockup.
Figure 74
ISL dedicated mode: using PRI/DTI trunk

QMT11 switch settings
If using the QMT11 ASIM, set the DIP switches, located on top of the unit
under the flip-up, as follows:
•

Hotline, On; See Note 1.

•

Forced DTR, On; See Note 2.

•

FDX (full duplex), On

•

SYNC, On

•

INTernal CLK, On
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

188 ISL installation

•

Modem/Network, Modem

•

Auto Answer, On

•

Loopback, Off
Note 1: Set only one side of the interface to originate the hot line.
Note 2: Forced Data Terminal Ready (DTR) automatically reinitiates a
dropped hot line call.

QMT8 switch settings
If the QMT8 Asynchronous Data Module (ADM) is used, set the switches as
follows:
Switch 1:
set to zeros (no VFDN)

Switch 3:

Switch 4:

1. not used

1. on

2. not used

2. on (hot line*)

3. FDX (full duplex)

3. off (DTR-data
terminal
ready-required)

4. modem
5. internal clock
6. no echo
7. auto answer

4. on (synchronous)
U5 and U7 must be
jumpered

8. off (no loopback)
* Only one side of the
interface should be set to
originate the hot line.

QMT21C switch settings
If using the QMT21 HSDM, set the dip switches, located on top of the unit
under the flip-up, as follows.
•

Hotline, On; See Note 1.

•

Forced DTR, On; See Note 2.

•

FDX (full duplex), On

•

SYNC, On

•

INTernal CLK, On

•

Modem/Network, Modem

•

Auto Answer, On

•

Loopback, Off
Note 1: Set only one side of the interface to originate the hot line.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

ISL installation 189

Note 2: Forced Data Terminal Ready (DTR) automatically reinitiates a
dropped hot line call.

ISL installation
Use Procedure 22 "Install ISL in dedicated mode" (page 189) to install ISL
in dedicated mode. Use Procedure 23 "Install ISL in shared mode" (page
189) to install ISL in shared mode.
Modem paths must have individual configurations: route data blocks, trunks,
and routes.

Install ISL in dedicated mode (digital and analog)
DTI or PRI should already be up and running.
Procedure 22
Install ISL in dedicated mode

Step

Action

In LD17, configure ISL for dedicated mode.
USR = ISLD
ISLM = Number of trunks handled by this D-channel (1-382)

In LD16, configure the Route Data Block to map out the software
parameters for these trunks.

Install the modem with leased line functionality.

In LD14, reassign old trunks to the routes just built in LD16.

In LD16, out the old DTI route. A separate Route Data Block should
be built for Leased Line, or to accommodate the dialing plan for a
dedicated modem.
—End—

Install ISL in shared mode
DTI or PRI should already be up and running.
Procedure 23
Install ISL in shared mode

Step

Action

In LD14, remove the PRI trunks.

In LD17, configure ISL for dedicated mode.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

190 ISL installation

USR = SHA
ISLM = Number of trunks handled by this D-channel (1-382)
3

In LD16, build a PRI route data block. This is the same route you just
removed in step 1.
ISDN = YES

In LD16 build another route data block to correspond to the IAS
routes.

In LD14, assign trunks to the newly configured routes.
—End—

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

191

Echo canceller installation
Contents
The section contains information on the following topics:
"Introduction" (page 191)
"Echo canceller operating parameters" (page 191)
"Echo canceller initialization procedures" (page 191)
"PRI to Echo canceller pin assignments" (page 192)
"Electromagnetic Interference" (page 192)

Introduction
Echo cancellers are required only in cases where satellite transmission is
being used. The echo canceller detects the length of the loop, and cancels
out transmission reflections (which result in audible echoes of voices on
satellite-carried calls).

Echo canceller operating parameters
The operational parameters of the echo canceller must be:
•

Data transfer rate: 4800 baud

•

System unit number: 1

•

Display timeout: active

•

Failures before alarm: 3

Echo canceller initialization procedures
Each of the 24 channels on the echo canceller must be initialized as shown
here:
•

Bypass: OFF

•

Off-hook: ON

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

192 Echo canceller installation

•

Canceller only: OFF

•

H reset: OFF

•

H hold: OFF

PRI to Echo canceller pin assignments
The echo canceller is controlled by an RS-232 port on the PRI circuit pack.
The following tables give the echo canceller pin assignments, operating
parameters and initialization procedures.
See Table 70 "PRI-to-Echo canceller - pin assignments" (page 192) for
PRI-to-Echo canceller pin assignments; refer to Figure 75 "PRI to echo
canceller cabling" (page 193) for a PRI-to-Echo-canceller cabling schematic.
Table 70
PRI-to-Echo canceller - pin assignments

PRI pin

Echo canceller
pin

EIA RS-232-C
circuit
designator

TXD
(Transmitted Data)

RXD
(Received Data)

RTS
(Request to Send)

—

CTS
(Clear to Send)

—

Common Return
(signal ground)

DCD
(received line signal detector)

DTR
(data terminal ready)

Signal

Electromagnetic Interference
The Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) filter assembly for PRI is PO643763.
The system meets FCC Part 15, Subpart J, Class A requirements regarding
EMI. In order to accomplish this, the SDI cables must exit the cabinet
through EMI filters on the I/O panel. This procedure depends on the system
cabinet type.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Electromagnetic Interference 193
Figure 75
PRI to echo canceller cabling

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

194 Echo canceller installation

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

195

1.5 Mb PRI implementation
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
"Overview" (page 195)
"Hardware requirements" (page 195)
"Hardware description" (page 196)
"Install PRI hardware" (page 203)

Overview
Digital trunks are supported in the Small System cabinet, the IP expansion
cabinet, and the Media Gateway.
This chapter provides the following information required to install PRI on a
system:
•

hardware and software installation

•

implementation procedures for basic call service

While either the hardware or software can be installed first, the PRI cannot
be enabled and tested until both are completed.

Hardware requirements
Circuit cards
To implement PRI on the system, the hardware shown in Table 71 "Required
circuit cards" (page 195) is required.
Table 71
Required circuit cards
Circuit card

Description

NTRB21

DTI/PRI TMDI card.

NTAK09

DTI/PRI circuit card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

196 1.5 Mb PRI implementation

Circuit card

Description

NTAK20
Clock-controller daughterboard. Small Systems
supports only one active clock controller per system
or IP expansion cabinet.

Note: Every cabinet/Media Gateway that contains a
digital trunk must contain a clock controller.
NTAK93

D-channel-handler (DCH) interface daughterboard.

NTBK51BA

Downloadable D-channel daughterboard (DDCH).
Connects to the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card.

Cables
The following cables are required for PRI connections:
•

PRI to external T1 cable

•

NTBK04 carrier cable

•

NT8D97 50-foot extension (if needed)

Channel Service Units (CSU)
When connecting the DTI/PRI to the public network, CSUs are required by
most operating companies. One CSU is required per PRI. Suitable CSUs
which support 64 Kbps clear and Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution (B8ZS) are
available from vendors such as Verilink, Digitalink, Kentrox, and Tellabs.
Note: Contact your Nortel Sales representative for specific local CSU
requirements.

Hardware description
Media Gateway/Media Gateway Expansion
The Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion contain physical card
slots, numbered 1 to 10. When configuring the system, the physical card
slot numbers must be transposed to logical card slot numbers. For example,
to configure a card physically located in slot two of the Media Gateway one,
use logical slot 12. To configure a card physically located in slot two of the
Media Gateway two, use logical Slot 22.
Table 72 "Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion slot assignments"
(page 197) maps physical card slot numbers to logical card numbers for the
Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion and reflects added support
for the Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion physical card slot 4.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Hardware description

197

Table 72
Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion slot assignments
Media Gateway/Media Gateway Expansion
First

Third

Second

Fourth

Physical
card
slot

Logical
card
slot

Physical
card
slot

Logical
card
slot

Physical
card
slot

Logical
card
slot

Physical
card
slot

Logical
card
slot

Media
Gateway

Media
Gateway
Expansion
Legend
* Not supported.

NTRB21 TMDI card
The NTRB21 TMDI card provides 1.5 MBit/s Digital Trunk Interface or
Primary Rate Interface functionality on the system. The NTRB21 has a
built-in, downloadable D-channel.
The NTRB21can be equipped with the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card (with the
NTBK51 downloadable D-channel daughterboard) and the NTAK93 DCHI
daughterboard.
Note: A TMDI D-channel programmed as a backup D-channel against a
non-TMDI primary D-channel is not supported. Backup D-channels are
supported only when programmed against TMDI primary D-channels.
Figure 76 "NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate" (page 198) shows a faceplate
of the NTRB21 TMDI card.

Shelf slot assignments
For Small Systems, the NTRB21 can be placed in main and expansion
cabinets in any single card slot given in Table 74 "Shelf slot assignments
for NTRB21, NTAK09, and NTAK20" (page 202).
The Media Gateway Expansion does not support digital trunks (DTI/PRI).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

198 1.5 Mb PRI implementation
Figure 76
NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate

NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card
The NTAK09 Digital Trunk Interface/Primary Rate Interface (DTI/PRI) card
provides the physical interface for the DS-1 facility T-1 carrier on the
system. It is required for PRI and DTI operation and is also used for ISL
shared-mode applications.
Figure 77 "NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card" (page 199) shows the faceplate
layout, the location of the switch and the position of the daughterboards
and connectors.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Hardware description

199

Shelf slot assignments
For cabinet systems, the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card can be placed in main and
expansion cabinets in any single card slot given in Table 74 "Shelf slot
assignments for NTRB21, NTAK09, and NTAK20" (page 202).
Digital trunk cards are not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion.
Figure 77
NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card

NTAK20 Clock Controller (CC) daughterboard
Digital Trunking requires synchronized clocking so a shift in one clock source
results in an equivalent shift of the same size and direction in all parts of the
network. Synchronization is accomplished with the NTAK20 clock controller
circuit card in each Main and IP expansion cabinet/Media Gateway.

ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Every Small System cabinet or Media Gateway that contains a digital trunk must
contain a clock controller.
If a Small System is equipped with digital trunks, it is recommended that at least
one digital trunk be placed in the main cabinet.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

200 1.5 Mb PRI implementation

Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from
different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade
voice quality.
The Clock Controller circuitry synchronizes the system to an external
reference clock, and generates and distributes the clock to the system. A
Small System can function either as a slave to an external clock or as a
clocking master.
The NTAK20AA version of the clock controller meets AT&T Stratum 3 and
Bell Canada Node Category D specifications. The NTAK20BA version
meets CCITT stratum 4 specifications.

Clocking modes
The system supports a single clock controller that can operate in one of two
modes - tracking or non-tracking (also known as free-run).
Tracking mode In tracking mode, one or possibly two DTI/PRI cards
supply a clock reference to a clock controller daughterboard. One DTI/PRI
is defined as the primary reference source for clock synchronization, while
the other is defined as the secondary reference source (PREF and SREF in
LD 73).
There are two stages to clock controller tracking, as follows:
•

tracking a reference

•

locked onto a reference

When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to match
its frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the frequencies
are very nearly matched, the clock controller locks onto the reference. The
clock controller makes small adjustments to its own frequency until incoming
and system frequencies correspond.
If the incoming clock reference is stable, the internal clock controller tracks
it, locks onto it, and matches frequencies exactly. Occasionally, however,
environmental circumstances cause the external or internal clocks to drift.
When this happens, the internal clock controller briefly enters the tracking
stage. The green LED flashes momentarily until the clock controller locks
onto the reference once again.
If the incoming reference is unstable, the internal clock controller is
continuously in the tracking stage, with the LED flashing green all the time.
This condition does not present a problem, instead it shows that the clock
controller is continually attempting to lock onto the signal. However, if slips
are occurring, there is a problem with the clock controller or the incoming
line.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Hardware description

201

Free-run (non-tracking) In free-run mode, the clock controller does not
synchronize on any source, it provides its own internal clock to the system.
This mode can be used when the system is used as a master clock source
for other systems in the network. Free-run mode is undesirable if the system
is intended to be a slave. It can occur, however, when both the primary and
secondary clock sources are lost due to hardware faults, or when invoked
by using software commands.

Shelf slot assignment
For cabinet systems, the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card can be placed in main and
expansion cabinets in any single card slot given in Table 74 "Shelf slot
assignments for NTRB21, NTAK09, and NTAK20" (page 202).
Note: For CISPR B group cabinets, the active Clock Controller
(NTAK20) can only occupy slots 1-3, 11-13, 21-23, 31-33, or 41-43 in
an Option 11C cabinet. For FCC and/or CISPR A group cabinets, this
limitation does not exist.
On non-CISPR B system cabinets, the NTAK20 can be placed in slots 1-9 of
the Option 11C main cabinet. On cabinets NTAK11Dx and NTAK11Fx, the
active NTAK20 must be placed in slots 1-3 (slots 4-10 cannot be used.)
On non-CISPR B IP expansion cabinets, the NTAK20 can be placed in slots
11-19, 21-29, 31-39, 41-49 of the first, second, third, and fourth expansion
cabinets, respectively.

Clock controller LED states
The clock controller LED, on the NTAK09 or NTRB21 faceplates, is in
various states depending on the status of the clock controller.
Table 73
Clock controller LEDs
LED

Clock controller

On (Red)

NTAK20 is equipped and disabled.

On (Green)

NTAK20 is equipped and is either locked to a reference
or in free run mode.

Flashing (Green)

NTAK20 is equipped and attempting to lock (tracking
mode) to a reference. If the LED flashes continuously
over an extended period of time, check the CC STAT in
LD 60. If the CC is tracking this can be an acceptable
state. Check for slips and related clock controller error
conditions. If none exist, then this state is acceptable,
and the flashing is identifying jitter on the reference.

Off

NTAK20 is not equipped.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

202 1.5 Mb PRI implementation

Shelf slot assignments for NTRB21, NTAK09 and NTAK20
Table 74 "Shelf slot assignments for NTRB21, NTAK09, and NTAK20"
(page 202) provides the shelf slot assignments for the NTRB21 TMDI card,
NTAK09 DTI/PRI card, and NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard in
Small Systems. The NTAK 93 DCH and NTBK51BA DDCH daughterboards
are not included in this table since they are mounted on the NTAK09
DTI/PRI circuit card and not on a shelf.
Table 74
Shelf slot assignments for NTRB21, NTAK09, and NTAK20
NTAK20
Clock controller
daughterboard
NTRB21
TMDI card

NTAK09
DTI/PRI
circuit card

CISPR B
cabinets

1 – 9

1 – 3

1 – 9
(see Note 2)

Expansion 1

11 – 19

11 – 13

11 – 19

Expansion 2

21 – 29

21 – 23

21 – 29

Expansion 3

31 – 39

31 – 33

31 – 39

Expansion 4

41 – 49

41 – 43

41 – 49

Main

Small
System

NonCISPR B
cabinets

Note: On cabinets NTAK11Dx and NTAK11Fx, the active card must be
placed in slots 1 – 3 (slots 4 to 10 cannot be used).

NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface (DCHI) daughterboard
The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard interfaces with the system Central
Processing Unit (CPU) and mounts on the NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card
for PRI or ISL shared mode applications. The DCHI is responsible for
performing the Q.921 layer 2 protocol information. It transfers layer 3
signaling information between two adjacent network switches.
The NTAK93 DCH daughterboard, when installed on the NTAK09 circuit
card, is addressed in the same slot as the NTAK09. The NTAK93 can use
SDI I/O addresses 0 to 79 and port 1.
Note: I/O addresses 0, 1, 2, 8 and 9 are preconfigured on the Small
System and must not conflict with the I/O addresses on the NTAK93
card.
A minimum of one NTAK93 is required for each PRI link. If more than one
PRI link connects to the same end location, a single DCHI circuit card can
support up to a maximum of sixteen PRI connections for the Small System.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Install PRI hardware 203

This allows a total of 382 B-channels or PRI trunks to be supported if a
backup D-channel is also used. A total of 383 B-channels or PRI trunks are
supported if a backup channel is not used.

NTBK51BA Downloadable D-channel (DDCH) daughterboard
The NTBK51BA DDCH daughterboard interfaces with the Small System
Central Processing Unit (CPU) and mounts on the NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit
card for PRI D-channel applications. The DDCH is equivalent to the MSDL
card used on a Large System, but it only supports D-channel applications
(no SDI or ESDI).
The NTBK51BA DDCH daughterboard, when installed on the NTAK09
circuit card, is addressed in the same slot as the NTAK09.
A minimum of one NTBK51BA is required for each PRI link. If more than
one PRI link connects to the same end location, a single DDCH circuit
card can support up to a maximum of sixteen PRI connections for the
Small Systems. This allows a total of 382 B-channels or PRI trunks to be
supported if a backup D-channel is also used. A total of 383 B-channels or
PRI trunks are supported if a backup channel is not used.
For more information on expansion daughterboards, refer to Communication
Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Small System Planning and Engineering
(NN43011-220).

Install PRI hardware
Install/remove daughterboard on the NTRB21 TMDI card
Work on a flat surface when mounting or removing daughterboards.
Procedure 24
Mounting the NTAK20 daughterboard on the NTRB21

Step

Action

Visually inspect the connector pins on the underside of the
daughterboard. Straighten and realign any bent pins prior to
mounting.

Place the NTRB21 down flat on an antistatic pad.

From an overhead view, with the daughterboard parallel above
the NTRB21 and the connector pins aligned over the connector
sockets, line up the mounting holes on the daughterboard (Figure 78
"NTAK20 daughterboard installation on the NTRB21" (page 204))
with the tops of the standoffs on the NTRB21.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

204 1.5 Mb PRI implementation

Slowly lower the daughterboard towards the NTRB21, keeping the
standoffs in line with all four holes, until the holes are resting on the
tops of the four standoffs.
If more than a very slight amount of pressure is required at this point,
the connector pins cannot be aligned with the connector socket. If
so, lift the daughterboard off the NTRB21 and return to step 2.

Gently apply pressure along the edge of the board where the
connector is located until the standoffs at the two corners adjacent
to the connector snap into a locked position. Then press down on
the two corners on the opposite side until they also lock into place.
Figure 78
NTAK20 daughterboard installation on the NTRB21

—End—

Insert/remove the NTRB21 TMDI card
Refer to Table 74 "Shelf slot assignments for NTRB21, NTAK09, and
NTAK20" (page 202) to determine the slot assignment for the NTRB21
TMDI circuit card appropriate to the system.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Install PRI hardware 205

The NTRB21 card is installed only in the Media Gateway. It is not supported
in the Media Gateway Expansion.
Procedure 25
Inserting the NTRB21 TMDI card

Step

Action

Check for available card slots in the base cabinet and print the
configuration record to determine which slots can be used. To do
this, enter the following command in LD 22:
PRT CFN in LD 22

If in PRI mode, enter the following command in LD 96 to software
disable the D-channel:
DIS DCH x

where x is the DCH port number that was assigned in LD 17.
3

If the Clock Controller is enabled, enter the following command in LD
60 to software disable it:
DIS CC 0

Hold the NTRB21 by the lock latch, unlock the latch, and slide the
card into the cabinet.
Note: Refer to Table 74 "Shelf slot assignments for NTRB21,
NTAK09, and NTAK20" (page 202) to determine the correct slot
in which to insert the card.

Enter the following command in LD 96 to enable the TMDI card:
ENL TMDI x ALL

where x is the NTRB21 TMDI card number (DLOP). The card
number associated with an NTRB21 TMDI card is based on the
slot in which the card is installed.
6

Within about 30 seconds, the D-channel layer 3 should be
established. To confirm, enter the following command in LD 96 to
request the current status of the D-channel:
STAT DCH (N)

The system response is:
DCH N EST OPER

This means that the D-channel is established and operational.
—End—

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

206 1.5 Mb PRI implementation
Procedure 26
Removing the NTRB21 TMDI card

Step

Action

If in PRI mode, enter the following command in LD 96 to software
disable the D-channel:
DIS DCH x

where x is the DCH port number that was assigned in LD 17.
2

If the Clock Controller is enabled, enter the following command in LD
60 to software disable it:
DIS CC 0

Enter the following command in LD 96 to disable the NTRB21 TMDI
card:
DIS TMDI x All

where x is the NTRB21 TMDI card number (DLOP). The card
number associated with a NTRB21 TMDI card is based on the slot in
which the card is installed.
4

Hold the NTRB21 by the lock latch, unlock the latch, and slide the
card out from the cabinet.
—End—

Install/remove daughterboards on the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card
Use these guidelines to mount the NTAK20 CC and the NTAK93 DCHI or
NTBK51 DDCH daughterboards on the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card. Because
of the physical layout of the mother and daughterboards, the NTAK93 or
NTBK51 should be mounted before the NTAK20. Work on a flat surface
when mounting or removing daughterboards.
Procedure 27
Mounting the daughterboards on the NTAK09

Step

Action

Visually inspect the connector pins on the underside of the
daughterboard. Straighten and realign any bent pins prior to
mounting.

Place the NTAK09 down flat on an antistatic pad.

From an overhead view, with the daughterboard parallel above
the NTAK09 and the connector pins aligned over the connector
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

Install PRI hardware 207

sockets, align the mounting holes on the daughterboard (Figure 79
"Daughterboard installation on the NTAK09" (page 208)) with the
tops of the standoffs on the NTAK09.
4

Slowly lower the daughterboard toward the NTAK09, keeping the
standoffs in line with all four holes, until the holes rest on top of the
four standoffs.
Note: If more than a very slight amount of pressure is required at
this point, the connector pins are not aligned with the connector
socket. If so, lift the daughterboard off the NTAK09 and return
to step 2.

Gently apply pressure along the edge of the board where the
connector is located until the standoffs at the two corners adjacent to
the connector snap into a locked position. Then press down on the
two corners on the opposite side until they also are locked into place.
—End—

Use these guidelines to remove the NTAK20 Clock Controller (CC) and the
NTAK93 DCHI or NTBK51 DDCH daughterboards from the NTAK09 DTI/PRI
card. Because of the physical layout of the mother and daughterboards, the
NTAK20 should be removed before the NTAK93 or NTBK51.
Procedure 28
Removing the daughterboards from the NTAK09

Step

Action

Starting at the two corners opposite the connector, gently lift each
corner out of the locking groove of the standoff.

At the two corners adjacent to the connector, gently lift the entire
side until the mounting holes are clear of the locking groove of the
standoff.

To remove the connector pins, grasp the edge of the board adjacent
to the connector and lift gently.
If more than one NTAK09 card is installed, the additional cards might
not carry daughterboards, depending on the system configuration.
At least one NTAK20 (per system) is always required.
—End—

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

208 1.5 Mb PRI implementation
Figure 79
Daughterboard installation on the NTAK09

Set switches on NTAK09 DTI/PRI card
Set the switches on the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card according to Table 75
"NTAK09 switch settings" (page 208).
Table 75
NTAK09 switch settings
Distance to digital
cross connect

1
DCH F/W

2
(LEN 0)

3
(LEN 1)

4
(LEN 2)

0 - 133 feet

Off

133 - 266 feet

Off

266 - 399 feet

Off

399 - 533 feet

Off

533 - 655 feet

Off

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Install PRI hardware 209

Installing the NTAK09
Refer to Table 74 "Shelf slot assignments for NTRB21, NTAK09, and
NTAK20" (page 202) to determine the slot assignment for the NTAK09
DTI/PRI circuit card appropriate to the system.
The NTAK09 DTI/PRI card is installed only in the Media Gateway. It is not
supported in the Media Gateway Expansion.
Procedure 29
Installing the NTAK09

Step

Action

Check for available card slots in the base and expansion cabinets,
and Media Gateway systems and print the configuration record to
determine which slots can be used. To do this, enter the following
command in LD 22:
PRT CFN

Hold the NTAK09 by the lock latch, unlock the latch, and slide the
card into the cabinet.
Note: Refer to Table 74 "Shelf slot assignments for NTRB21,
NTAK09, and NTAK20" (page 202) to determine the correct slot
in which to insert the card.
—End—

The only cable required to support the NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card is the
NTBK04 cable. The cable is twenty feet long. If additional distance is
required, the NT8D97AX fifty-foot extension is available up to a 600 foot
maximum. Table 76 "DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04 cable" (page
210) gives pinout information for the NTBK04.
Procedure 30
Connecting the cables

Step

Action

Connect the NTBK04 cable to a 50-pin Amphenol connector on the
cabinet.
For a Small System, the Amphenol connector is located below the
card slot in which the NTAK09 circuit card is installed.

Connect the other end of the cable to the CSU or DSX-1 cross
connect.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

210 1.5 Mb PRI implementation
Table 76
DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04 cable
From 50-pin
MDF connector

To DB-15

Signal
name

pin 48

pin 1

transmit tip to
network

pin 23

pin 9

transmit ring to
network

pin 25

pin 2

FGND

frame ground

pin 49

pin 3

receive tip from
network

pin 24

pin 11

receive ring from
network

Description

—End—

Procedure 31
Enabling the NTRB21 TMDI card

Step

Action

Enter the following command in LD 96 to enable the NTRB21 TMDI
card:
ENL TMDI x ALL

where x is the NTRB21 TMDI card number (DLOP). The card
number associated with a NTRB21 TMDI card is based on the slot in
which the card is installed.
2

If in PRI mode, enter the following command in LD 96 to software
enable the D-channel:
ENL DCH y

where y is the DCH port number that was assigned in LD 17.
3

Within about 30 seconds, the D-channel layer 3 should be
established. To confirm, enter the following command in LD 60 to
request the current status of the D-channel:
STAT DCH (N)

The system response is:
DCH N EST OPER

This means that the D-channel is established and operational.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Install PRI hardware 211

—End—

Procedure 32
Enabling the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card

Step

Action

The DCHI and PRI cards must be configured prior to software enabling the
NTAK09. Refer to the procedure Procedure 33 "Implementing basic PRI"
(page 212) for further information.
1

Enter the following command in LD 60 to software enable all NTAK09
DTI/PRI cards:
ENLL C

where C is the DTI/PRI card number (DLOP). The card number
associated with a DTI/PRI card is based on the slot in which the
card is installed.
Under normal conditions, this step enables the clock controller and
D-channel interface. If enable fails, enter the following command in
LD 60 to software enable clock tracking on the primary digital card:
ENL CC 0

Enter the following command in LD 96 to software enable the
NTAK93 (DCHI) daughterboard:
ENL DCHI N

where N is the DCHI I/O address.
3

Within about 30 seconds, the D-channel layer 3 should be
established. To confirm, enter the following command in LD 60 to
request the current status of the D-channel:
STAT DCH (N)

The system response is:
DCH N EST OPER

This means that the D-channel is established and operational.
—End—

Use this procedure to configure the PRI cards, DCHI interface, DCH link and
ISDN trunk route and trunks (B-channels) that are required to implement
PRI between systems. No feature applications other than Basic Call Service
are included in the implementation.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

212 1.5 Mb PRI implementation

PRI cards must be configured before defining the DCH links or PRI
applications.
Prompts which do not show a response can be left as default. For more
information on any of these prompts, refer to Software Input Output
Administration (NN43001-611).
Before installing PRI cards in an IP expansion cabinet/Media Gateway,
first configure the expansion cabinet/Media Gateway for IP connectivity.
Refer to LD 117 in the Software Input Output Reference — Maintenance
(NN43001-711) for further information.
To implement PRI on the system:
Procedure 33
Implementing basic PRI

Step

Action

Add a PRI card. step 6

Add a DCHI card. "LD 17 - Adding a PRI card" (page 212)

Define a PRI customer. "LD 15 - Defining a PRI customer" (page
214)

Define a PRI service route. "LD 16 - Configuring an ISDN service
route" (page 215)

Define service channels (B-channels) and PRI trunks. "LD 14 Defining service channels and PRI trunks" (page 216)

Define clock synchronization. "LD 73 - Defining system timers and
clock controller parameters" (page 217)
—End—

LD 17 - Adding a PRI card
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

CHG

Change existing data.

TYPE

CFN

Configuration data block.

CEQU

YES

Changes to common equipment.

PRI

loop x card x

For Large Systems and Small Systems

TMDI

(Yes)
No

TMDI Card (Mode set to PRI OR TRK) Option 11C Cabinet Other card

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Install PRI hardware 213
LD 17 - Adding a D-channel interface
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

CHG

Change existing data.

TYPE

ADAN

Action Device And Number.

- ADAN

NEW DCH xx
CHG DCH xx
OUT DCH xx

Add a primary D-channel (any unused SDI port.)
Change a primary D-channel.
Remove the primary D-channel, where:
xx =0-79.

- CTYP

DCHI

DCHI = D-channel configuration for the NTAK09 card or
NTAK93.

MSDL
MSDL = NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel daughterboard.
TMDI
TMDI = D-channel configuration on TMDI (NTRB21) card.
- CDNO

1-50

Card slot number to be used as the primary DDCH/DCHI.
Card slots 10, 20, 30, 40, and 50 are only applicable for
D-channel configuration of ISL or VNS.

- PORT

PORT must be set to 1.

- DES

Designator.

- USR

PRI

D-channel is for ISDN PRI only.

- IFC

Interface type.

- - DCHL

PRI loop number.

- OTBF

1-(16)-127

Number of output request buffers.

Note: For a single PRI link, leave this prompt at default (16).
Add 5 output request buffers per additional link.
- DRAT

64KC

D-channel transmission rate.

- SIDE

NET (USR)

Prompted only if IFC is set to SL1.
NET = network, the controlling switch.
USR = slave to the controller.

- RLS

Release ID of the switch at the far-end of the D-channel.

- RCAP

ND2

Remote capability.

- OVLR

YES (NO)

Allow or disallow overlap receiving on a D-channel. Default
is NO. Enter carriage return if settings are to be left at
default.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

214 1.5 Mb PRI implementation

Prompt

Response

Description

- LAPD

YES (NO)

Change LAPD parameters. Enter carriage return if timers
are to be left at default. The following timers are prompted
only if LAPD is set to YES. (They can all be left at default
during initial setup.)

- - T23

1-(20)-31

Interface guard timer checks how long the interface takes to
respond. In units of 0.5 seconds (default 20 = 10 seconds).

- - T200

2-(3)-40

Retransmission timer in units of 0.5 seconds (default 3 =
1.5 seconds).

- - N200

1-(3)-8

Maximum number of retransmissions.

- - N201

4(260)

Maximum number of octets in information field.

--K

1-(7)-32

Maximum number of outstanding unacknowledged frames
(NAKS).

LD 15 - Defining a PRI customer
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ:

NEW
CHG

Add new data.
Change existing data.

TYPE:

NET

Networking Data.

0-99

Customer number
Range for Large System, Call Server 1000E, and Media
Gateway 1000E

0-31

Range for Small System, Media Gateway 1000B

xxxx

Listed Directory number 0 must be defined for ISDN PRI
DID service.

CUST

LDN0

The length of LDN0 determines the number of trailing digits
translated as the dialed DN on PRI DID routes.
Up to seven digits can be entered if DNXP option 150 is
equipped. Otherwise, up to four digits can be entered.
AC2

ESN Access Code 2. Enter incoming ISDN call types
(NARS network translation types) for which AC2 must be
inserted when INAC = YES in LD 16.
Multiple responses are allowed. Prompted only if NARS
is equipped. If a NARS call type is not entered here, it is
defaulted to AC1.
NPA
NXX
INTL
SPN
LOC

E.164 National.
E.164 Subscriber.
International.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Install PRI hardware 215

Prompt

Response

Description
Special Number.
Location Code

ISDN

YES

Customer is equipped with ISDN.

- PNI

(0) 1-32700

Private Network Identifier. Each customer data block must
have a unique PNI when multi-customer option is equipped.
PNI = 1 is typical for CUST = 0. It must be matched by
the PNI in the far-end RDB.
Note: Using the default value of PNI = 0 prevents operation
of features like NRAG, NACD and NMS.

- HNPA

NPA

Telephone area code for this system. Sent as part of setup
message as calling line identification.

- HNXX

NXX

Telephone local exchange code for this system. Sent as
part of setup message as calling line identification.

- - HLOC

XXX

Home location code (NARS), prompted when PRA = YES.

- - LSC

1-9999

One to four digit Local Steering Code, if required in the
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP). LSCs are required only if
the CDP DNs are longer than the local PDNs.
The CLID sent for a CDP call is composed of the LSC
defined in LD 15 plus the PDN of the calling set. Various
ISDN network features depend on the CLID as the "return
address" for sending feature control messages.
Multiple LSCs can be defined in LD 87 for CDP, but only
one LSC can be defined here for CLID.

LD 16 - Configuring an ISDN service route
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

NEW
CHG

Add new data.
Change existing data.

TYPE

RDB

Route data block.

TKTP

xxx

Trunk type.

DTRK

YES

Digital trunk route.

- DGTP

PRI

1.5 Mb PRI. Prompted only if PRA = YES in LD15.

ISDN

YES

ISDN option.

- MODE

PRA

Route used for PRA only.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

216 1.5 Mb PRI implementation

Prompt

Response

Description

- - PNI

(0) 1-32700

Private Network Identifier. Each customer data block must
have a unique PNI when multi-customer option is equipped.
PNI = 1 is typical for CUST = 0. It must be matched by
the PNI in the far-end RDB.

Note: Using the default value of PNI = 0, prevents operation
of features like NRAG, NACD and NMS.
IFC

Interface type.

- CHTY

BCH

Signalling type - prompted if DTRK is YES. D-channel
signalling for B-channels.

- CTYP

Call Type. Enter the call type to be associated with the
outgoing route for direct dialing using the trunk access
code (instead of NARS access code).
See the Software Input Output Administration
(NN43001-611) for a listing of possible responses.

- INAC

YES

Insert ESN Access Code based on NARS/BARS call
type for incoming calls on TIE routes only. If NARS is
equipped, this feature inserts AC1 or AC2, depending on
the responses to AC2 in LD 15 Customer Data Block.
For NARS/BARS call types, INAC bypasses incoming digit
insertion specified by INST in LD 16 Route Data Block.
Unknown call types, including CDP steering codes, are
not affected by INAC, and do not bypass digit insertion
specified by INST.
INAC must be set to YES to support features such as
Network ACD and Network Message Services, which
depend on non-call associated TCAP facility messages.

LD 14 - Defining service channels and PRI trunks
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

NEW
CHG

Add new data.
Change existing data.
When assigning several members at once use the multiple
create command NEW XX.

TYPE

TIE

TIE Trunk only, allowed between MSL-1.

l ch

Loop and channel for digital trunks
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

Install PRI hardware 217

Prompt

Response

Description

0-511 1-510

Route number and Member number
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.

0-127 1-4000

Range for Meridian 1 Small System, Media Gateway 1000B.

RTMB

LD 73 - Defining system timers and clock controller parameters
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

CHG

Change existing data.

TYPE

PRI

1.5 Mb PRI.

FEAT

SYTI

System timers.

CCO

Card slot number for Clock Controller 0.

PREF CCO

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock
reference for the main cabinet

SREF CCO

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock
reference for the main cabinet

CC1

Card number for Clock Controller 1.

PREF CC1

Primary Reference DTI/PRI loop for Clock controller one.

SREF CC1

Secondary Reference DTI/PRI loop for Clock controller
one.

CC2

Card number for Clock Controller 2.

PREF CC2

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC
containing the primary clock reference.

SREF CC2

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC
containing the primary clock reference.

CC3

Card number for Clock Controller 3.

PREF CC3

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC
containing the primary clock reference.

SREF CC3

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC
containing the primary clock reference.

CC4

Card number for Clock Controller 4.

PREF CC4

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC
containing the primary clock reference.

SREF CC4

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC
containing the primary clock reference.

CCAR

0-(15)

Clock Controller Audit Rate.
Enter the time (in minutes) between normal CC audits.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

218 1.5 Mb PRI implementation

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

219

1.5 Mb DTI implementation
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
"Overview" (page 219)
"Hardware requirements" (page 219)
"Hardware description" (page 196)
"Install DTI hardware" (page 220)
"Software enable the DTI/PRI cards" (page 222)

Overview
This chapter provides the information required to install DTI on a system,
including:
•

hardware and software installation

•

implementation procedures for basic call service

This chapter covers the most common type of Nortel DTI installation – a
24-channel Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) installation between two systems,
or between a system and a central office.
Digital trunks are supported in Small System IP expansion cabinets.

Hardware requirements
To implement DTI on the system, the hardware listed in Table 77 "DTI
hardware" (page 219) is required:
Table 77
DTI hardware
Item

Description

NTRB21

DTI/PRI TMDI card

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

220 1.5 Mb DTI implementation

Item

Description

NTAK09

DTI/PRI Circuit card

NTAK20

Clock Controller Daughter board.
Option 11C Cabinet support only one active Clock
Controller per IP Expansion cabinet.

NTBK04

Carrier Cable

Cables
The following cables are required for DTI connections:
•

DTI to external T1 cable

•

NTBK04 carrier cable

•

NT8D97 50-foot extension (if needed)

Channel Service Units (CSU)
When connecting the DTI/PRI to the public network, Channel Service Units
(CSUs) are required by most operating companies. One CSU is required
per DTI. Suitable CSUs which support 64 Kbps clear and Bipolar 8 Zero
Substitution (B8ZS) are available from vendors such as Verilink, Digitalink,
Kentrox and Tellabs.
Contact your Nortel Sales representative for specific local CSU
requirements.

Hardware description
Refer to "Hardware description" (page 196).

Install DTI hardware
Refer to ""Install PRI hardware" (page 203)" for information on installing
DTI hardware. Specifically:
•

To install the NTRB21 DTI/PRI card, see "Insert/remove the NTRB21
TMDI card" (page 204).

•

To install the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card, see "Installing the NTAK09" (page
209).

•

To install the NTAK20 Clock Controller, see "Install/remove
daughterboards on the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card" (page 206).

Set the switches
Set the switches on the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card according to Table 78
"NTAK09 switch settings" (page 221).

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Install DTI hardware 221
Table 78
NTAK09 switch settings
Distance to digital
crossconnect

1
DCH F/W

2
(LEN 0)

3
(LEN 1)

4
(LEN 2)

0 - 133 feet

Off

133 - 266 feet

Off

266 - 399 feet

Off

399 - 533 feet

Off

533 - 655 feet

Off

Connect the cables
For Small Systems, connect the NTBK04 cable to the 50-pin amphenol
connector below the card slot in which the NTAK09 circuit card is installed.
Connect the other end of the cable to the CSU or DSX-1 cross connect.
The NTBK04 is twenty feet long. If additional distance is required, the
NT8D97AX 50-foot extension is available up to a 600-foot maximum. The
only cable required to support the NTAK09 circuit card is the NTBK04.
Pinout information on the NTBK04 cable is given in Table 79 "DS-1 line
interface pinout for NTBK04 cable" (page 221).
Table 79
DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04 cable
From 50-pin
MDF connector

to DB-15

Signal
name

Description

pin 48

pin 1

transmit tip to network

pin 23

pin 9

transmit ring to
network

pin 25

pin 2

FGND

frame ground

pin 49

pin 3

receive tip from
network

pin 24

pin 11

receive ring from
network

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

222 1.5 Mb DTI implementation

Software enable the DTI/PRI cards
Procedure 34
Enabling the NTRB21 TMDI card

Step

Action

Enter the following command in LD 96 to enable the NTRB21 TMDI
card:
ENL TMDI x ALL
where
x is the NTRB21 TMDI card number (DLOP). The card number
associated with a NTRB21 TMDI card is based on the slot in
which the card is installed.

If in DTI mode, enter the following command in LD 96 to software
enable the D-channel:
ENL DCH y
where
y is the DCH port number that was assigned in LD 17.

Within about 30 seconds, the D-channel layer 3 should be
established. To confirm, enter the following command in LD 60 to
request the current status of the D-channel:
STAT DCH (N)

The system response is:
DCH N EST OPER

This means that the D-channel is established and operational.
—End—

The DCHI and DTI cards must be implemented prior to software enabling
the NTAK09. Refer to the section Procedure 33 "Implementing basic PRI"
(page 212) for further information.
Procedure 35
Enabling the NTAK09 card

Step

Action

Enter the following command in LD 60 to software enable all NTAK09
DTI/PRI cards:

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Software enable the DTI/PRI cards 223

ENLL C
where
C is the DTI/PRI card number (DLOP). The card number
associated with a DTI/PRI card is based on the slot in which the
card is installed.
Under normal conditions, this step enables the clock controller and
D-channel interface. If enable fails, go to step 2.
2

Optional: Enter the following command in LD 60 to enable clock
tracking on the primary digital card:
ENL CC 0

Enter the following command in LD 96 to software enable the
NTAK93 (DCHI) daughterboard:
ENL DCHI N
where
N is the DCHI I/O address.

Within about 30 seconds, the D-channel layer 3 should be
established. To confirm, enter the following command in LD 60 to
request the current status of the D-channel:
STAT DCH (N)

The system response is:
DCH N EST OPER

This means that the D-channel is established and operational.
—End—

Use this procedure to implement the DTI software interface between
systems or between a system and a central office.
Procedure 36
Implementing DTI

Step

Action

Add a DTI card. See "LD 17 - Adding a DTI card" (page 224).

Configure a DTI trunk route. See "LD 16 - Configuring a DTI trunk
route" (page 224).

Configure the trunks. See "LD 14 - Configuring the trunks" (page
225).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

224 1.5 Mb DTI implementation

Assign clock’s reference source. See "LD 73 - Assigning a clock
reference source" (page 225).
—End—

LD 17 - Adding a DTI card
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

CHG

Change existing data.

TYPE

CFN

Configuration data block.

...
PARM

YES

...
PCML

(MU) A

System PCM law.
Default is MU law.

CEQU

YES

Changes to common equipment.

DLOP

ll dd ff

Digital Trunk Interface Loop or Loops

MODE

TRK

Select Digital Trunk Interface mode.

TMDI

(YES) NO

Whether the card is a TMDI card.

YALM

DG2 (FDL)

Yellow alarm method — prompted only if the frame format
is ESF — Must match the far end.

...

Use FDL with ESF and use DG2 with non-ESF. If not
prompted then DG2 is set automatically.
TRSH

0-15

The maintenance and threshold table to be used for this
DTI card, as configured in LD 73.

T1TE

012

T1 Transmit Equalization (0=0-200 ft., 1=200-400 ft,
2=400-700 ft). Only for TMDI = YES.

LD 16 - Configuring a DTI trunk route
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

NEW
CHG

Add new data.
Change existing data.

TYPE

RDB

Route data block.

TKTP

Create a trunk route.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Software enable the DTI/PRI cards 225

Prompt

DTRK

Response

Description

COT
WAT
DID
TIE
FEX

Central Office Trunk data block WATS Trunk data block
Direct Inward Dial Trunk data block TIE Trunk data block
Foreign Exchange

YES

Digital trunk route.

LD 14 - Configuring the trunks
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

NEW
CHG

Add new data.
Change existing data.

TYPE

xxx

Trunk type

l ch

Loop and channel for digital trunks

RTMB

0-511 1-4000

Route number and Member number
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.

0-127 1-4000

Range for Meridian 1 Small System, Media Gateway
1000B.

LD 73 - Assigning a clock reference source
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

CHG

Change existing data.

TYPE

DDB

Digital Data Block.

CCO

Card slot number for Clock Controller 0.

PREF CCO

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock
reference for the main cabinet

SREF CCO

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock
reference for the main cabinet

CC1

Card number for Clock Controller 1.

PREF CC1

Primary Reference DTI/PRI loop for Clock controller one.

SREF CC1

Primary Reference DTI/PRI loop for Clock controller one.

CC2

Card number for Clock Controller 2.

PREF CC2

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC
containing the primary clock reference.

SREF CC2

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC
containing the primary clock reference.

CC3

Card number for Clock Controller 3.

PREF CC3

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC
containing the primary clock reference.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

226 1.5 Mb DTI implementation

Prompt

Response

Description

SREF CC3

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC
containing the primary clock reference.

CC4

Card number for Clock Controller 4.

PREF CC4

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC
containing the primary clock reference.

SREF CC4

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC
containing the primary clock reference.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

227

1.5 Mb ISL implementation
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
"Overview" (page 227)
"Hardware requirements" (page 227)
"Basic ISL implementation" (page 232)

Overview
This chapter contains the information required to implement ISL on the
system. It describes:
•

hardware and software installation

•

hardware and software configuration for basic call service

Two modes of ISL are available: shared and dedicated. This chapter covers
the most common type of Nortel ISL installation, an ISDN Signaling Link
(ISL) installation in dedicated mode using dedicated and leased lines.

Hardware requirements
To implement ISL regardless of operation mode, analog or digital TIE lines
are used as B-channels:
•

NT8D15 or NT8D14 Analog TIE Trunk cards

•

NTAK09 Digital trunk cards (for shared mode)

•

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card (for dedicated mode)

Shared mode
In shared mode, PRI hardware plus the existing TIE line interface card is
required.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

228 1.5 Mb ISL implementation

Dedicated mode
Dedicated mode requires modems. See Figure 80 "ISL in dedicated mode
using leased line" (page 228) and Figure 81 "ISL in dedicated mode using
dialup modem" (page 229) for details.
The requirements for using a leased line are
Table 80
Leased line requirements
Hardware

Comments

NTAK02

D-channel Handler Interface
(DCHI) Card for ISL mode.

Modem

Modem capable of the following:
(such as Ventel 2400-33 or 2400 Plus II)

NTAK19BA

•

minimum of 2400 baud

•

synchronous operation

•

must support leased line (also known as private
line or point-to-point) operation

Four port break out cable.

Figure 80
ISL in dedicated mode using leased line

Using dialup modems
The requirements for using a dialup modem are:

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

ISL hardware installation (dedicated mode)

229

Table 81
Dial-up modem requirements
Hardware

Comments

NT8D09

500 set line card.

NTAK02

D-channel Handler Interface (DCHI) Card (for ISL
mode).

Modem

Modem capable of the following: (such as Ventel
2400-33 or 2400 Plus II)

NTAK19BA

•

minimum of 2400 baud

•

synchronous operation

•

modems are programmed such that one
modem originates the call while the other
auto-answers

•

auto dial capability

Four port break out cable.

Figure 81
ISL in dedicated mode using dialup modem

ISL hardware installation (dedicated mode)
Use Procedure 37 "Installing ISL hardware" (page 230) to install hardware
for an ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) in dedicated mode using dedicated
leased lines. For shared mode, hardware installation is identical to the PRI
installation found in "1.5 Mb PRI implementation" (page 195), with the
addition of analog or digital TIE Trunks or both.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

230 1.5 Mb ISL implementation

The NTAK02 connects to a modem via the NTAK19BA four-port cable. Only
ports 1 and 3 are available for use as DCHIs.
Procedure 37
Installing ISL hardware

Step

Action

Set option switches/jumpers on the NTAK02 card as shown in Table
82 "NTAK02 switch setting" (page 230) and Table 83 "NTAK02
jumper settings" (page 230) for mode of operation (RS232 or RS422
and DTE or DCE.)

Table 82
NTAK02 switch setting
Port 0

Port 1

SW 1-1

SW 1-2

SDI

DCH

OFF

SDI

DPNSS

OFF

—

ESDI

Port 2

Port 3

SW 1-3

SW 1-4

SDI

DCH

OFF

SDI

DPNSS

OFF

—

ESDI

Table 83
NTAK02 jumper settings
Unit

Jumper location

Strap for DTE

Strap for DCE

Unit 0

J10

C - B

B - A

Unit 1

J7
J6

C - B
C - B

B - A
B - A

Unit 2

C - B

B - A

Unit 3

J4
J3

C - B
C - B

B - A
B - A

Unit

Jumper location

RS422

RS232

Unit 0

—

Unit 1

J9
J8

C - B
C - B

B - A
B - A

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

ISL hardware installation (dedicated mode)

Unit

Jumper location

RS422

RS232

Unit 2

—

Unit 3

J2
J1

C - B
C - B

B - A
B - A

231

Install the NTAK02 in any available slot 1-10 of the Option
11C Cabinet or slot 11-14 of Media Gateway 1.

Install the NTAK19BA four-port cable on the 50-pin Amphenol
connector associated with the slot the NTAK02 is installed in.

If the installation is a dedicated mode using leased line modem
configuration, the D-channel connects the DCHI with the far-end
modem over a dedicated leased line. The modems must have a
minimum transmission rate of 2400 baud and must support leased
line capability and synchronous mode, 2-wire or 4-wire operation.
Modems such as Ventel 2400 Plus II can be used. You must specify
4-wire operation when ordering. Otherwise, the modem is factory
shipped for 2-wire operation.
Note: The Hayes Smart modem 2400 cannot be used on leased
lines.

If the installation is a dedicated mode using dialup modem (such as
Hayes 2400, Ventel 2400 or Gandalf 2400) configuration, the DCHI is
connected to a modem that is connected to a 500 set line card. The
call is connected to the far-end via the 500 set-to-TIE Trunk path.
Note: Dedicated mode using leased line modems is the
preferred method.

Set up the D-channel. Configure the modem at one end in the
autodial mode so it automatically initiates a call to the other end at
power-up. The autodial number must be coordinated with the far-end
switch. The originating modem must have this autodial number
stored internally as part of the modem configuration routine. The
far-end modem must be configured for auto-answer.
—End—

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

232 1.5 Mb ISL implementation

Basic ISL implementation
Implement dedicated mode
Use Procedure 38 "Implementing dedicated mode" (page 232) to configure
basic ISL capability. It applies to analog TIE Trunks that are used as
B-channels. When DTI/PRI trunks are also used, LD 17 digital loop (DLOP)
and LD 73 (digital data block-DDB) must also be configured with the
appropriate clocking and threshold settings.
The DCHI in this case uses the NTAK02 circuit card and does not support
ISDN PRI signaling. The DCHI is reserved for ISL use only. The D-channel
can communicate with the far-end by means of a dedicated leased line
modem or dialup modem.
For ISL dedicated mode using a dialup modem, a 500 set, TIE Trunk route
and member have to be configured (used for D-channel).
Configuring dedicated mode involves four major steps:
Procedure 38
Implementing dedicated mode

Step

Action

Configure the D-channel for ISL (LD 17).

Enable ISDN option (LD 15).

Enable the ISL option on a per route basis, assigning a D-channel
for each route (LD 16).

Assign a channel identification to each trunk with the ISL option
(LD 17).
—End—

LD 17 - Configuring the D-channel for ISL
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

NEW
CHG

Add new data.
Change existing data.

TYPE

CFN

Configuration data block.

ADAN

NEW DCH 0-79

Add primary D-channel.

CTYP

DCHI

D-channel card type.

CDNO

1-9 11-19 21-29
31-39 41-49

Card slot in which the card supporting the DCHI
resides.

PORT

Must be set to 1.

USR

PRI

D-channel for ISDN PRI only.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Basic ISL implementation

233

Prompt

Response

Description

IFC

SL1

Interface type.

DCHL

1-9

PRI card number (Must match entry for CDNO).

SIDE

NET (USR)

Net: network, the controlling switch.
User: slave to controller.

RLS

Software release of far-end. This is the current
software release of the far-end. If the far-end
has an incompatible release of software, it
prevents the sending of application messages,
for example, Network Ring Again.

CLOK

D-channel clock type for signaling.
EXT

Source of D-channel clock is external to DCHI
card (in this case, the DTI/PRI circuit card).
Normally, EXT is used for PRI/ISL.
Do not confuse this clock with the E1 span Clock
Controller found on the NTAK10/79. This clock
is in reference to the DCHI synchronous mode of
operation. Note: If directly connecting two DCHI
ports without modems, set "CLOK" to "EXT" on
one side and "INT" on the other.

LAPD

YES (NO)

Change LAPD parameters. Enter to leave
timers at default value. The following timers
are prompted only if LAPD is set to YES. The
following can all be left at default during initial
setup.

T23

1-(20)-31

Interface guard timer checks how long the
interface takes to respond. In units of 0.5
seconds (default 20 = 10 seconds).

T200

2-(3)-40

Retransmission timer in units of 0.5 seconds
(default 3 = 1.5 seconds).

N200

1-(3)-8

Maximum number of retransmissions.

N201

4(260)

Maximum number of octets in information field.

1-(7)-32

Maximum number of outstanding
unacknowledged frames (NAKS).

LD 73 - Configuring the D-channel for ISL
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

NEW CHG

Add new data. Change existing data.

TYPE

DDB

Digital data block.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

234 1.5 Mb ISL implementation

Prompt

Response

Description

TRSH

0-15

Assign a threshold set or table.

RALM

1-(3)-128

Yellow alarm 24-hour threshold.

BIPC

1-(2)-128

24-hour bit rate violation threshold.

LFAC

1-(3)-128

24-hour loss of frame alignment threshold.

BIPV

1-(3)-4
1-(2)-4

Bit rate (bipolar violation and CRC) monitoring limits for
maintenance and out-of-service thresholds.

SRTK

1-(5)-24
1-(30)-3600

Frame slip-tracking-monitoring limits (in hours).

SRNT

1-(15)1024
1-(3)-1024

Non-tracking slip-rate monitoring maintenance and
out-of-service thresholds.

LFAL

1-(17)-10240
1-(511)-10240

Loss of frame alignment monitoring limits.

SRIM

(1)-127

Slip rate improvement timer.

SRMM

1-(2)-127

Maximum number of times the slip rate exceeds the
maintenance limit.

LD 15 - Enabling ISDN option
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ:

NEW CHG

Add new data. Change existing data.

TYPE:

NET

Networking data.

CUST

0-99

Customer number Range for Large System, Call Server
1000E, and Media Gateway 1000E

0-31

Range for Small System, Media Gateway 1000B

ISDN

YES

Customer is equipped with ISDN.

PNI

1-32700

Customer private network identifier. This number MUST be
unique to this customer in the private network. It is used to
as part of the setup message for feature operation such as
Network Ring Again and Network ACD.

HNPA

NPA

Telephone area code for this system. Sent as part of setup
message as calling line identification.

HNXX

NXX

Telephone local exchange code for this system. Sent as
part of setup message as calling line identification.

HLOC

XXX

Home location code (NARS).

LSC

1-9999

One to four digit Local Steering Code established in the
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP). The LSC prompt is
required for Calling Line I.D. and Network ACD.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Basic ISL implementation

Prompt

Response

AC2

235

Description
Access Code 2. Enter call types (type of number) that use
access code 2. Multiple responses are permitted. This
prompt only appears on NARS equipped systems. If a call
type is not entered here, it is automatically defaulted to
access code 1.

NPA

E.164 National.

NXX

E.164 Subscriber.

INTL

International.

SPN

Special Number.

LOC

Location Code.

LD 16 - Enabling ISL option on a per-route basis, assigning a D-channel for each route
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

NEW CHG

Add new data. Change existing data.

TYPE

RDB

Route data block.

CUST

Customer number as defined in LD 15.

ROUT

0-511

Route number Range for Large System and CS 1000E
system.

0-127

Range for Meridian 1 Small System, Media Gateway 1000B

TKTP

TIE

TIE Trunk route.

DTRK

YES/NO

Enter YES if this is a Digital Trunk Interface (DTI or PRI).

ISDN

YES

ISDN option.

MODE

ISLD

Route for ISL application.

DCHI

DCHI port number in CFN which carries the D-channel for
this TIE Trunk route.

PNI

1-32700

Customer private network identifier. Must be the same as
the CDB PNI at the far-end.

IFC

Interface type.
SL1

Interface type

CTYP

Call Type. Enter the call type to be associated with the
outgoing route for direct dialing using the trunk access code
(instead of NARS access code). See the Software Input
Output Reference — System Messages (NN43001-712)
for a list of valid responses.

INAC

YES

Insert Access Code. Permits the NARS AC1 or AC2
access code to be reinserted automatically on an incoming
ESN call.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

236 1.5 Mb ISL implementation
LD 14 - Assigning a channel identification to each trunk with the ISL option
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

NEW CHG

Add new data. Change existing data.

TYPE

TIE

TIE Trunk type.

l ch

Loop and channel for digital trunks

RTMB

0-511 1-4000

Route number and Member number Range for Large
System and CS 1000E system.

0-127 1-4000

Range for Meridian 1 Small System, Media Gateway
1000B.

1-192

Channel identifier for ISL channels (remove with Xnn) must
be coordinated with far-end (no default value).

CHID

Implement shared mode
The same DTI/PRI software implementation sequence can be used as for
Dedicated mode with the following exceptions:
LD 17
Prompt

Response

Description

USR

SHA

D-channel for ISL in "shared" mode, used for both ISDN
PRI and ISL.

ISLM

1-192

Number of ISL B-channel (trunks) controlled by the
D-channel (no default value).

Prompt

Response

Description

IFC

SL1

Interface type must be SL1 (this is the only type supported
for ISL).

MODE

ISLD

TIE route used for ISL members.

DCHI

0-15

DCHI port number.

Prompt

Response

Description

CHID

1-192

Channel identifier for ISL channels. Must be coordinated
with the far-end.

LD 16

LD 14

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

237

2.0 Mb DTI implementation
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
"Overview" (page 237)
"Hardware requirements" (page 237)
"NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card" (page 238)
"Install DTI hardware" (page 238)
"DTI software implementation" (page 241)

Overview
This chapter provides the information required to install the 2.0 Mb Digital
Trunk Interface (DTI) card in a system. It includes information for:
•

hardware installation

•

software implementation

Hardware requirements
Hardware requirements for 2.0 Mb DTI are as follows:
•

2.0 Mb DTI Circuit card - NTAK10
(a Clock Controller is incorporated into the circuit card)

•

CEPT Cable – NTBK05DA (120 3/4 twisted pair – 6.15 m length)

•

CEPT Cable – NTBK05CA (75 3/4 coaxial – 6.15 m length)

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

238 2.0 Mb DTI implementation
Figure 82
2.0 Mb DTI cabling

NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card
The 2.0 Mb DTI card provides the physical interface for the digital E-1
carrier on the system. The card includes an onboard clock controller and is
installed in slots 1 through 9 in the Option 11C Cabinet. On IP Expansion
cabinets, it is placed in slots 11-19, 21-29, 31-39, 41-49 of the first, second,
third, and fourth expansion cabinets, respectively.
The NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card is also used for ISL shared mode applications.
For information on the NTAK10 faceplate LEDs, refer to ISDN Primary Rate
Interface Maintenance (NN43001-717).

Install DTI hardware
The NTAK10 circuit card is installed in card slot 1-9 in the Option 11C
Cabinet. On IP Expansion cabinets, it is installed in slots 11-19, 21-29,
31-39, 41-49 of the first, second, third, and fourth expansion cabinets,
respectively.
It is not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion. Up to four digital trunk
cards are supported in each Media Gateway. The NTAK10 card is installed
in Slots 1, 2, 3 and 4 of the Media Gateway.

ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller set to
an external reference clock.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

Install DTI hardware 239

Inspect the NTAK10 circuit card
Inspect the circuit card before installing it in the Option 11C Cabinet or
Media Gateway:
•

Locate the NTAK10 2.0 Mb circuit card and carefully remove it from its
packaging.

•

Inspect the circuit card for any visible damage that occurred during
shipping.

Set the switches
The NTAK10 incorporates four surface mounted dip switches. The following
tables provide information on the various settings and related functions of
these switches.
Note: The ON position for all the switches is toward the bottom of the
card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board adjacent to
the bottom left corner of each individual switch.
Set the switches on the circuit card according to the requirements of your
installation.

Switch S1 - Clock Controller (CC) configuration
This switch enables and disables the onboard Clock Controller (CC).
Table 84
Switch S1
Switch

Off (Up)

On (Down)

S1-1

Spare

S1-2

Clock Controller
Enabled

Clock Controller
Disabled

Switch S2 - Carrier impedance configuration
This switch sets the carrier impedance to either 1203/4 or 753/4. Twisted pair
cable is usually associated with 1203/4. Coaxial cable is usually associated
with the 753/4 setting.
Table 85
Switch S2
Switch

Off (Up)

On (Down)

S2-1

120 /4

753/4

S2-2

753/4

1203/4

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

240 2.0 Mb DTI implementation

Switch S3 - Mode of operation
This switch selects the operational mode for the NTAK10. The NTAK10
supports firmware that allows it to operate in the standard CEPT format
mode or the modified CEPT format used in France.
Table 86
Switch S3
Switch

Off (Up)

On (Down)

S3-1

Non-French Firmware

French Firmware

S3-2

Spare

Switch S4 - Carrier shield grounding
This switch supports selective shield grounding of the Tx and/or Rx pairs of
the carrier cable. Closing the switch (down position) applies Frame Ground
(FGND) to the coaxial carrier cable shield, creating a 753/4 unbalanced
configuration. The Tx and Rx pairs are referenced with respect to the 2.0
Mb DTI card that is, Rx is carrier received from the far-end device.
Table 87
Switch S4
Switch

Off (Up)

On (Down)

S4-1

Receive Shield
Unconnected

Frame Ground on
Receive Shield

S4-2

Transmit Shield
Unconnected

Frame Ground on
Transmit Shield

Note: The usual method is to ground the outer conductor of the receive
coax signal.

Insert the NTAK10
Install the circuit card in slots 1-9 in the Option 11C Cabinet, or in slots
11-19, 21-29, 31-39, 41-49 of the first, second, third, and fourth IP
expansion cabinets, respectively.
Secure the circuit card in the cabinet or Media Gateway by locking the lock
latch assemblies.
Procedure 39
Connecting the cables

Step

Action

In the cabling area, located directly below the card cage, remove
the retaining bar that secures the MDF cables. Connect the
NTBK05DA/CA interface cable to the 50-pin Amphenol connector
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

DTI software implementation

241

below the card slot holding the NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI circuit card.
Reinstall the retaining bar to secure the cable(s).
2

Terminate the NTBK05DA/CA carrier cable as required.
—End—

NTBK05DA pinouts
The pinouts for the NTBK05DA cable are as follows:
Table 88
NTBK05DA pinouts
Color

Signal

pin 23

pin 6

Black

pin 48

pin 7

White

pin 50

pin 9

Bare

R0/T0 FGND

pin 24

pin 2

Black

pin 49

pin 3

Red

pin 25

pin 5

Bare

R1/T1 FGND

NTBK05CA pinouts
The pinouts for the NTBK05CA cable are as follows:
Table 89
NTBK05CA pinouts
From:
50-pin MDF
connector

To:
Transmit coax
connector

To:
Receive coax
connector

To:
50-pin MDF
connector

pin 23

Inner conductor

—

pin 48

outer conductor

—

pin 24

—

Inner conductor

—

pin 49

—

outer conductor

—

pin 21

—

pin 49

pin 46

—

pin 48

DTI software implementation
The following procedure describes the process required to program basic 2.0
Mb DTI on the system main and IP expansion cabinets or Media Gateway.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

242 2.0 Mb DTI implementation

Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 17 - Adding a 2.0 Mb DTI card" (page 242)
2. "LD 73 - Defining the 2.0 Mb DTI ABCD signaling bit tables" (page 242)
3. "LD 73 - Defining the 2.0 Mb DTI pad tables" (page 246)
4. "LD 73 - Defining the 2.0 Mb DTI timers" (page 249)
5. "LD 73 - Defining the 2.0 Mb DTI system timers" (page 252)
6. "LD 16 - Configuring the service routes" (page 253)
LD 17 - Adding a 2.0 Mb DTI card
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

CHG

Change.

TYPE

CEQU

Common equipment.

Enter a card slot number for 2.0 Mb DTI.

...
DTI2

LD 73 - Defining the 2.0 Mb DTI ABCD signaling bit tables
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

NEW
CHG

Add or change Digital Trunk Interface data block.

TYPE

DTI2

2.0 Mb/s DTI data block.

FEAT

ABCD

ABCD bit signaling category.

SICA

2-16

Signaling category.

(1)-16

Default signaling category used for default values

...
DFLT

JDMI defaults to 16 with 3.
Incoming/Outgoing Calls:
IDLE(S)

abcd

(Send) idle signal bits.

IDLE(R)

abcd

(Receive) idle signal bits.

FALT(S)

abcd

(Send) bits. 2.0 Mb DTI out-of-service.

If FALT (send) signal not required.

abcd

(Receive) bits. 2.0 Mb DTI out-of-service.

If FALT (receive) signal not required.

FALT(R)

Incoming Calls:

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

DTI software implementation

Prompt

Response

Description

SEZ(R)

abcd

Seize signal (send or receive) for voice or data calls from or
to a non-SL-1.

SEZD(R)

abcd

Seize signal (send or receive) for data calls between SL-1s.

If SEZD(R) signal not required.

abcd

Seize signal (send or receive) for voice calls.

If SEZV(R) signals not required.

P CALL(R)

abcd

(Receive) signal sent during seize by an incoming CO trunk.

TIME

ON OFF

Length of pulse time on, and time off.
(default 2 seconds on, 8 seconds off)

SEZA(S)

abcd

Seize signal acknowledgment (send).

If SEZA(S) signal not required.

abcd

Wink start (corresponds to a pulsed seize acknowledgment).
Prompted when SEZA(S) not required.

If WNKS(S) signal not required.

TIME

10-(220)-630

Time for WNKS(S) signal in milliseconds.

P DIGT(R)

abcd

(Receive) decadic pulses.

If DIGT(R) not required.

abcd

Number received signal (send).

If NRCV(S) signal not required.

abcd

End of selection free (send).

If EOSF(S) not required.

TIME

(100)-150

Time for EOSF(S) in milliseconds.

P EOSB(S)

abcd

End of selection busy (send).

If EOSB(S) not required.

TIME

(100)-150

Time for EOSB(S) in milliseconds.

P OPCA(R)

abcd

Operator calling time (receive) signal.

If OPCA(R) not required.

TIME

64-(128)-192

Time of OPCA(R) pulse in milliseconds.

REPT

(1)-5

Number of OPCA(R) pulses.

CONN(S)

abcd

Connect send.

CONN(R)

abcd

Connect receive.

P RRC(S)

abcd

If RRC(S) not required.

TIME

10-(100)-150

Time of RRC(S) signal in milliseconds.

P BURS(S)

abcd

Bring up receiver (send). Uses switchhook flash timer for timer.

SEZV(R)

P WNKS(S)

NRCV(S)

P EOSF(S)

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

243

244 2.0 Mb DTI implementation

Prompt

Response

Description

If BURS(S) not required.

abcd

Bring up receiver (receive). Uses switchhook flash timer for
timer.

If BURS(R) not required.

TIME

64-(128)-192

Length of BURS(R) pulse in milliseconds.

P CAS(S)

abcd

CAS Flash. Same timing as analogue trunks.

P BURS(R)

Note: Prompted for JDMI only. Operational only if CASM
package equipped.

CLRB(S)

P RCTL(S)

If CAS(S) not required.

abcd

Clearback (send) signal.

If CLRB(S) not required (IDLE signal is used).

abcd

Release control (send) signal.

If RCTL(S) not required.

Note: Prompted only when CLRB is unused or is defined the
same as IDLE.
TIME

100-(150)-300

Time value is stored in multiples of 10 milliseconds.

R RCOD(S)

abcd

Release Control Originating party Disconnect. This signal is
another pulsed SL-1 signal sent on incoming trunks when the
originating party disconnects first.

If RCOD(S) not required.

TIME

150

Timer value in milliseconds is fixed.

P OPRS(R)

abcd

Operator (receive) manual recall signal.

If OPRS(R) not required.

xxx yyy

Minimum and maximum time range for OPRS(R) in milliseconds.

TIME

xxx = 8-(48)-2040
yyy = xxx-(128)-2040
P NXFR(S)

P ESNW(S)

P CAS(S)

abcd

Network transfer signal (send) pulse. Pulse time not variable.

If NXFR(S) not required.

abcd

ESN wink signal (send) pulse. Pulse time not variable.

If ESNW(S) not required.

abcd

Centralized Attendant signal (send) pulse. Pulse time not
variable.
Note: Prompted for 2.0 Mb DTI only.

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

DTI software implementation

Prompt

CLRF(R)

SOSI

Response

Description

If CAS(S) not required.

abcd

Clear forward (receive).

If CLRF(R) not required.

abcd

Special operator signal defined.

(N)

Undefined. Prompted when OPRC = N.

245

Outgoing Calls:
SEZA(S)

abcd

Seize acknowledgement

SEZD(S)

abcd

Seize acknowledgement and (send) data signal.

If SEZD(S) not required.

SEZV(S)

abcd

Seize acknowledgement and (send) voice signal. Only
recommended for Meridian to M-1 applications.

TIME

xxx yyy

Minimum and maximum time range for OPRS(R) in milliseconds.
xxx = 8-(48)-2040
yyy = xxx-(128)-2040

If SEZV(S) not required.

abcd

Seize acknowledgment (receive) signal.

If SEZA(R) not required.

abcd

Wink start pulsed seize acknowledgment (receive) signal.

If P WNKS(R) not required.

TIME

20-(140)-500,
20-(290)-500

Minimum and maximum length of WNKS(R) pulse in
milliseconds.

P EOS(R)

abcd

End of selection (receive) signal.

If EOS(R) not required.

TIME

(64)-320
64-(256)-320

Length of EOS(R) pulse stored in multiples of 8 milliseconds.

CONN(S)

abcd

Connect send.

CONN(R)

abcd

Connect receive.

P OPRC(R)

abcd

Operator recall signal for special services. minimum three
pulses of 160 milliseconds each.

If OPRC(R) not required.

abcd

Bring up receiver (send) for L1 networking.

If BURS(S) not required.

abcd

Bring up receiver (receive) for L1 networking.

If BURS(R) not required.

SEZA(R)

P WNKS(R)

P BURS(S)

P BURS(R)

Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

246 2.0 Mb DTI implementation

Prompt

Response

Description

TIME

64-(128)-192

Length of BURS(R) pulse in milliseconds.

If SEZV(S) not required.

abcd

CAS Flash. Same timing as analogue trunks. Prompted for
JDMI only. Operational only if CASR package equipped.

If CAS(R) not required.

abcd

Clear back.

If CLRB(R) not required, when IDLE is used.

abcd

Release control. Prompted only when CLRB is unused or is
defined the same as IDLE.

If RCTL(R) not required.

TIME

96-(128)-320
96-(256)-320

Time value stored in multiples of 8 milliseconds.

P NXFR(R)

abcd

Network transfer.

If not required.

abcd

ESN wink signal.

If ESNW(R) not required.

abcd

Centralized attendant service signal.
2.0 Mb DTI only 3.

If CAS(R) not required.

abcd

Clear forward (send).

If CLRF(S) not required.

(0)

800 milliseconds.

P CAS(R)

CLRB(R)

P RCTL(R)

P ESNW(R)

P CAS(R)

CLRF(S)

TIME

Note: Prompted when the abcd bits entered in response to the
CLFR(S) prompt are different from the abcd bits of the IDLE
signal.
SOSO

abcd (N)

Special operator signal defined (undefined).

Note: Prompted when OPRC = N.
LD 73 - Defining the 2.0 Mb DTI pad tables
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

NEW
CHG

Add or change Digital Trunk Interface data block.

TYPE

DTI2

2.0 Mb DTI.

FEAT

PAD

Request the digital pad feature.

DTI software implementation

Prompt

Response

Description

PDCA

1-16

PAD Category table.

247

If one channel is using the specified table, then the command
is aborted.
Cannot modify or delete Table 1.
TNLS

YES (NO)

TN List. This is for the print command only.
A YES response means that a list of the trunk TNs using the
requested PAD category tables are printed after the table.

DFLT

(1)-16

For NEW only. The table is used for default values.

The following prompts define the pad levels.
The receiving pad code is r and the transmission pad code is t. These entries have the range 0-15.
The pad values (in decibels) relating to these codes are shown after this table.
ONP

r t

On-premises extension.

OPX

r t

Off-premises extension.

DTT

r t

Digital TIE trunks.

SDTT

r t

Digital Satellite TIE trunks.

NTC

r t

Nontransmission compensated.

TRC

r t

Transmission compensated.

DCO

r t

Digital COT, FEX, WAT, and DID trunks.

VNL

r t

Via Net Loss.

DTO

r t

2.0 Mb DTI digital TOLL office trunks.

ACO

r t

AnalogCO or WATS trunks.

AFX

r t

Analog FEX trunks.

ADD

r t

Analog DID trunks.

SATT

r t

Analog satellite TIE trunks.

TNLS

YES (NO)

TN List. This is for the print command only.
A YES response means that a list of the trunk TNs using the
requested PAD category tables are printed after the table.

DFLT

(1)-16

For NEW only. The table is used for default values.

248 2.0 Mb DTI implementation

Prompt

Response

Description

ONP

r t

On-premises extension.

OPX

r t

Off-premises extension.

TNLS

YES (NO)

TN List. This is for the print command only.
A YES response means that a list of the trunk TNs using the
requested PAD category tables are printed after the table.

DFLT

(1)-16

For NEW only. The table is used for default values.

r t

On-premises extension.

OPX

r t

Off-premises extension.

DTT

r t

Digital TIE trunks.

SDTT

r t

Digital Satellite TIE trunks.

NTC

r t

Nontransmission compensated.

TRC

r t

Transmission compensated.

DCO

r t

digital COT, FEX, WAT, and DID trunks.

VNL

r t

Via Net Loss.

DTO

r t

2.0 Mb DTI digital TOLL office trunks.

ACO

r t

Analog CO or WATS trunks.

AFX

r t

Analog FEX trunks.

ADD

r t

Analog DID trunks.

SATT

r t

Analog satellite TIE trunks.

ATO

r t

Analog TOLL office trunks.

DTI2

r t

2.0 Mb DTI trunk
(Prompted only if the 1.5/2.0 Mb Gateway feature is equipped
and TYPE=DTI2).

XUT

r t

Analog CO trunk
(Prompted only if the 1.5/2.0 Mb Gateway feature is equipped
and TYPE=DTI2).

XEM

r t

Analog TIE trunk
(Prompted only if the 1.5/2.0 Mb Gateway feature is equipped
and TYPE=DTI2).

The following pads are available for the 2.0 Mb DTI card. Their respective
codes are also given. Positive dB represents loss and negative dB
represents gain.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

DTI software implementation

249

Table 90
2.0 Mb DTI pads
code

value (dB)

0.0

+1.0

+2.0

+3.0

+4.0

+5.0

+6.0

+7.0

code

value (dB)

+8.0

+9.0

+10.0

+11.0

+12.0

+13.0

+14.0

-1

code

value (dB)

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

code

value (dB)

-10

idle

+0.6

LD 73 - Defining the 2.0 Mb DTI timers
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

NEW
CHG

Add or Change Digital Trunk Interface data block

TYPE

DTI2

2.0 Mb DTI

FEAT

LPTI

Set the timers used for a 2.0 Mb DTI

LOOP

2.0 Mb DTI card slot number.
xx = 1-9 in Main Cabinet.
xx = 11-19, 21-29, 31-39, 41-49 in IP expansion cabinets
1-4, respectively.
xx = 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 of the first, second, third and
fourth Media Gateway, respectively.

P DIGT (S)

P METR(R)

abcd

Digit pulse timing from TDS (Bits P, X or U are selectable)

If DIGT(S) signal not required

abcd

Metering (receive). Bits P, X or U. Only two P bits allowed.
COT and DID trunks only.

Note: PPM package must be enabled.
N

If METR(R) signal not required

PPM bit counted when changed from 1 to 0.

PPM bit counted when changed from 0 to 1.

TIME

40-(240)-480

Maximum time METR signal is in milliseconds.

SASU

0-(1920)-8064

Seize acknowledge supervision period in milliseconds.
2.0 Mb DTI default = 1920

EDGE

250 2.0 Mb DTI implementation

Prompt

Response

Description

MFAO

YES (NO)

DTI card will or will not set bit 3 of timeslot 0 if loss of
Multiframe Alignment Signal (MFAS) occurs.
2.0 Mb DTI default = NO
= no change is required

SZNI

YES (NO)

PSTN incoming seizure during lockout of MFAS and far-end
fault states allowed (denied)

MFF

CRC

Multiframe format - Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC 4)

(AFF)

Alternative Frame Format

Note: Prompted for Small Systems.

The following prompts and associated responses define the grade of service
timers for the DTI card. Group I problems are treated individually. They are
bipolar violations, bit error rate (frame alignment) slips, and CRC-4 errors.
Group II problems are treated as a group. They are bit 3 of TS0 (far-end
out of service), bit 6 of TS16 (far-end lost multiframe alignment), AIS (alarm
indication signal), loss of frame alignment, and loss of multiframe alignment.
Responses are interpreted as follows:
•

mt = Maintenance threshold time.

•

ct = New call suppression (hardware service removal) threshold time.

•

ot = Out of service threshold time.

•

dt = No new data calls suppression threshold time.

Each of the response times are expressed as follows:
•

nnnY = time in milliseconds where nnnn = 20-5000 (input to nearest
20 milliseconds.)

•

nnnS = time in seconds where nnn = 1-240

•

nnnM = time in minutes where nnn = 1-240

•

nnH = time in hours where nn = 1-24

DTI software implementation

251

LD 73 - Defining the grade of service timers for the DTI card
Prompt

Response

Description

CRC

NC mt dt ct ot

Cyclic redundancy check error counts.
NC = Error count values are in the range 1-255.
mt = Maintenance threshold time (MNT).
dt = No new data calls threshold time (NNDC).
ct = No new calls threshold time (NNC).
ot = Out of service threshold time (OOS).

Note: The following requirements must be met for input.

mt = Maintenance threshold is equal to or greater than dt.
dt = Data calls threshold is equal to or greater than ct.
ct = Calls threshold is equal to or greater than ot.
BPV

NB mt dt ct ot

Bipolar violation error counts.
NB = Error count values are in the range 1-255.
mt = Maintenance threshold time (MNT).
dt = No new data calls threshold time (NNDC).
ct = No new calls threshold time (NNC).
ot = Out of service threshold time (OOS).

Note: The following requirements must be met for this input: mt
= >dt = >ct = >ot.
FAP

NF mt dt ct ot

Frame alignment problem thresholds.
NF = Error count values are in the range 1-255.
mt = Maintenance threshold time (MNT).
dt = No new data calls threshold time (NNDC).
ct = No new calls threshold time (NNC).
ot = Out of service threshold time

Note: The following requirements must be met for this input: mt
= >dt = >ct = >ot.
SLP

NS mt dt ct ot

Maintenance threshold slip count.
NS = Error count values are in the range 1-255.
mt = Maintenance threshold time (MNT).
dt = No new data calls threshold time (NNDC).
ct = No new calls threshold time (NNC).
ot = Out of service threshold time (OOS).

252 2.0 Mb DTI implementation

Prompt

Response

Description

GP2

T2 mt dt ct ot

Group 2 error thresholds.
This is the maximum amount of time that can occur before
software checks the associated thresholds of 120 to 32640
msec and rounds it to the closest multiple of 128 msec. T2 error
count values are in the range 1-(20)-255. NC = Error count
values are in the range 1-255.
mt = Maintenance threshold time (MNT).
dt = No new data calls threshold time (NNDC).
ct = No new calls threshold time (NNC).
ot = Out of service threshold time (OOS).

Note: The following requirements must be met for this input: mt
= >dt = >ct = >ot.
FRFW

YES (NO)

This 2.0 Mb DTI card is (is not) equipped with special Firmware
for France.

LD 73 - Defining the 2.0 Mb DTI system timers
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

NEW
CHG

Add or Change Digital Trunk Interface data block.

TYPE

DTI2

2.0 Mb DTI.

FEAT

SYTI

Change the switch timers and counters for 2.0 Mb DTI.
There is only one such block per switch.

MAND

0-(15)-1440

Maintenance guard time in minutes.

NCSD

0-(15)-1440
1S-59S

New call suppression guard time in minutes and seconds.

OSGD

0-(15)-1440

Out-of-service guard time in minutes.

OOSC

0-(5)-127

Out-of-service occurrences since midnight (DTI disabled).

PERS

0-(100)-254

Persistence timer in milliseconds for far-end problems.

DBNC

(10)-32

Debounce timer in milliseconds.

CCO

Card slot number for Clock Controller 0.

No change for defaults.

To remove clock controller data.

PREF CCO

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock
reference for the main cabinet

SREF CCO

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock
reference for the main cabinet

CC1

Card number for Clock Controller 1.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

DTI software implementation

253

Prompt

Response

Description

PREF CC1

Primary Reference DTI/PRI loop for Clock controller one.

SREF CC1

Primary Reference DTI/PRI loop for Clock controller one.

CC2

Card number for Clock Controller 2.

PREF CC2

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the
primary clock reference.

SREF CC2

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the
primary clock reference.

CC3

Card number for Clock Controller 3.

PREF CC3

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the
primary clock reference.

SREF CC3

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the
primary clock reference.

CC4

Card number for Clock Controller 4.

PREF CC4

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the
primary clock reference.

CCGD

0-(15)-1440

Clock controller free run guard time in minutes.

CCAR

0-(15)

Clock controller audit rate. The time, in minutes, between normal
CC audits. Only programmable on units equipped with 2-Mb DTI.

Note 1: The clock controller prompts only appear for clocks
which are valid for the machine type being configured. The
prompts only appear if the system is in a valid state for the
definition of the 2.0 Mb DTI clock controller data that is, the DTI
clock references must be unused or in a free-run mode.
Note 2: Before programming clock controller references, the
QPC775 clock controller card(s) must be plugged in, and the
switches on the system’s QPC441 3 Port Extender must be
appropriately set. Otherwise, the PREF and SREF prompts are
not given.

LD 16 - Configuring the service routes
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

NEW
CHG

Add or Change Route data block.

TYPE

RDB

Route data block.

CUST

Customer number, as defined in LD 15

254 2.0 Mb DTI implementation

Prompt

Response

Description

0-511

Route number
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.

0-127

Range for Meridian 1 Small System, Media Gateway 1000B.

ROUT

TKTP

RCLS

Service routes allowed with ISDN.
TIE
COT
DID

TIE trunk route.
Central office trunk.
Direct Inward Dial trunk.

(EXT)
INT

Class marked route as Internal or External.

DTRK
(NO)
YES

Digital trunk route.
Analog.
Digital.

DTI2

Select a digital trunk type of 2.0 Mb DTI.

NCNA

YES (NO)

Network Call Name is (is not) allowed.

NCRD

YES (NO)

Network Call Redirection. Allows network call redirection
messages to be sent (or blocks messages if NCRD=no).

DGTP
...

PTYP

Port type at far-end:
(ATT)
AST

Analog TIE trunk routes:
Analog TIE trunk.
Analogue satellite system TIE trunk or ESN satellite
Meridian SL-1 TIE trunk.
Analogue TIE trunk, used instead of ATT whenever the system
has one or more digital satellite trunk routes (DST) to any digital
satellite system which includes OPX sets.

AOT

DTT
DCT
DST

Digital TIE trunk routes:
Digital TIE trunk.
Combination digital TIE trunk.
Digital satellite system TIE trunk.

AUTO

YES (NO)

Auto-terminate must be NO if response to DSEL is VOD.

ICOG

IAO
ICT
OGT

Incoming and outgoing trunk.
Incoming trunk.
Outgoing trunk.

SRCH

(LIN)
RRB

Linear search, or round-robin search, used for outgoing trunks.

ACOD

xxxx

Trunk route access code.

TARG

1-15

Trunk access restriction group for routes.

OABS

0-9

Outgoing digit(s) to be absorbed.

INST

(0)-999

Digits to be inserted.

CNTL

(NO) YES

Changes to controls or timers.

DTI software implementation

Prompt

Response

NEDC

255

Description
Near-end disconnect control.

ETH

Either end control.

ORG

Originating end control. Default for TIE, ATVN, DID, and CCSA
trunk types.

FEDC

Far-end disconnect control.
ETH

Either end.

FEC

Far-end.

JNT

Joint.

(ORG)

Originating end.

DLTN

YES (NO)

Dial tone on originating calls.

TIMER

(30)-240

Network Ring Again duration timer time is in minutes.

Note: Package 148, Advanced ISDN Features, is required.
LD 14 - Defining the associated list of service trunks
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

NEW
CHG

Add or Change Trunk data block.

TYPE

TIE
COT
DID

TIE trunk route.
Central Office trunk data block.
Direct Inward Dial trunk data block.

CHID

1-382

Channel ID for this trunk.

l ch

Loop and channel for digital trunks

TOTN

New card slot and channel, where:

PDCA

(1) - 16

•

s = 1-9 DTI2 card slot number (Option 11C main cabinet)
s = 11-19 DTI2 card slot number (IP expansion cabinet 1)
s = 21-29 DTI2 card slot number (IP expansion cabinet 2)
s = 31-39 DTI2 card slot number (IP expansion cabinet 3)
s = 41-49 DTI2 card slot number (IP expansion cabinet 4)

•

c = 1-30, 2.0 Mb DTI channel

Pad Category Number. This prompt is given if the card is a 2.0
Mb DTI card, or if the card is a 2.0 Mb DTI card and the 1.5/2.0
Mb Gateway feature is equipped. For 2 to 16, the pad category
used must already be defined in LD 73.

256 2.0 Mb DTI implementation

Prompt

Response

Description

PCML

(MU) A

System PCM law.
Prompted if the card is 2.0 Mb DTI, or if the card is a 2.0 Mb
DTI card and the 2.0 Mb Gateway feature is equipped. MU, the
default, was entered in the PCML prompt in LD 17.

CUST

Customer number, as defined LD 15

NCOS

0-3
0-7
0-15

Network class-of-service group number:
CDP
BARS/NFCR
NARS

RTMB
0-511 1-4000

Route number and Member number
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.

0-127 1-4000

Range for Meridian 1 Small System, Media Gateway 1000B.

NITE

xxxx

Night-service directory number.

TGAR

(0)-15

Trunk group access restriction.

CLS

Class-of-service restrictions.

Note: If DIP option is selected, a new SLCA table must be
defined in LD 73.

257

2.0 Mb PRI implementation
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
"Overview" (page 257)
"Hardware requirements" (page 257)
"Hardware description" (page 258)
"Install the NTAK79 PRI card" (page 261)
"Install the NTBK50 PRI card" (page 266)
"PRI software implementation" (page 272)

Overview
This chapter provides the information required to install 2.0 Mb PRI on a
system. It includes information about hardware installation and software
implementation.

Hardware requirements
Circuit cards
To implement 2.0 Mb PRI, an NTAK79 or an NTBK50 PRI card plus
associated daughterboards is required.
Table 91
2.0 Mb PRI hardware requirement
Circuit card

Description

NTBK50

2.0 Mb PRI circuit card.
Supports the NTAK20 clock controller
daughterboard and a D-channel handler
interface daughterboard (NTAK93 DCHI or
NTBK51 DDCH).

258 2.0 Mb PRI implementation

Circuit card

Description

NTAK79

2.0 Mb PRI circuit card.
Supports an onboard clock controller and an
onboard D-channel handler interface.

NTAK20

Clock-controller daughterboard. The system
supports only one active clock controller per
system or IP expansion cabinet.

Note: Every cabinet or Media Gateway that
contains a digital trunk must contain a clock
controller.

Connects to the NTBK50 PRI card.
NTAK93

D-channel-handler interface (DCHI)
daughterboard.
Connects to the NTBK50 PRI card.

NTBK51

Downloadable D-channel daughterboard
(DDCH).
Connects to the NTBK50 PRI card.

Cables
One of the following cables is required for a PRI connection:
•

CEPT Cable - NTBK05DA (120 1/2 twisted pair—6.15 m length), or

•

CEPT Cable - NTBK05CA (75 1/2 Ensure the document title is correct. m
length)

Hardware description
2.0 Mb PRI cards
Two PRI cards are available on the system:
•

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

•

NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card

The difference between the two PRI cards is that the NTBK50, when
equipped with the NTBK51 D-channel daughterboard, can download
software onto the card. This feature is based on the MSDL platform and

Hardware description

259

essentially replaces the D-channel circuit on the NTAK79 PRI card. (The
NTAK79 PRI card does not support the NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel
handler daughterboard.)
A second difference between the NTAK79 and NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI cards
is that the NTAK79 has an onboard clock controller while the NTBK50
supports the NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard.
Note: If the NTAK93 D-channel daughterboard is attached to the
NTBK50 PRI card instead of the NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel
daughterboard, the NTBK50 PRI card functions in the same manner
as the NTAK79 PRI card.

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card
The 2.0 Mb Primary Rate Interface card provides the physical interface for
the digital E-1 carrier on the system. The card includes an onboard clock
controller and onboard D-channel handler. It is installed in slots 1-9 in the
main cabinet. On IP Expansion cabinets, it is installed in slots 11-19, 21-29,
31-39, 41-49 of the first, second, third, and fourth expansion cabinets,
respectively.
For information on the NTAK79 faceplate LEDs, refer to ISDN Primary Rate
Interface Maintenance (NN43001-717).

NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card
The 2.0 Mb Primary Rate Interface card provides the physical interface for
the digital E-1 carrier on the system. The card is installed in slots 1-9 in the
main cabinet or Media Gateway. On IP Expansion cabinets, it is installed
in slots 11-19, 21-29, 31-39, 41-49 of the first, second, third, and fourth
expansion cabinets, respectively.

ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller set to
an external reference clock.

Note: Clocking slips can occur between Media Gateway systems that
are clocked from different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The
slips can degrade voice quality.
The NTBK50 supports the following clock controller and D-channel handler
daughterboards:
•

NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard

•

NTAK93 D-channel handler daughterboard, or NTBK51 Downloadable
D-channel daughterboard.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

260 2.0 Mb PRI implementation

If the NTAK93 D-channel daughterboard is attached, the NTBK50 PRI card
functions in the same manner as the NTAK79 PRI card. If the NTBK51
D-channel daughterboard is attached, software is downloaded to the card
instead of residing in a D-channel circuit.
For information on the NTBK50 faceplate LEDs, refer to ISDN Primary Rate
Interface Maintenance (NN43001-717).

NTAK20 Clock Controller (CC) daughterboard
The NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard is used with the NTBK50 2.0
Mb PRI card. The NTAK79 PRI card has an onboard clock controller.
Digital Trunking requires synchronized clocking so that a shift in one clock
source results in an equivalent shift of the same size and direction in all
parts of the network. On systems, synchronization is accomplished with the
NTAK20 clock controller circuit card.

ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Every Small System cabinet or Media Gateway that contains a digital trunk must
contain a clock controller. If a Small System is equipped with digital trunks, Nortel
recommends that at least one digital trunk is placed in the Small System main
cabinet.

The Clock Controller circuitry synchronizes the system to an external
reference clock, and generates and distributes the clock to the system. The
system can function either as a slave to an external clock or as a clocking
master. The NTAK20AB version of the clock controller meets AT&T Stratum
3 and Bell Canada Node Category D specifications. The NTAK20BB version
meets CCITT stratum 4 specifications.

Shelf slot assignment
On non-CISPR B system cabinets, the NTAK20 is placed in slots 1-9. On
cabinets NTAK11Dx and NTAK11Fx, the active NTAK20 is placed in slots
1-3 (slots 4-10 cannot be used.) On IP Expansion cabinets, the NTAK20
is placed in slots 11-19, 21-29, 31-39, 41-49 of the first, second, third, and
fourth expansion cabinets, respectively.

NTAK93 D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI) daughterboard
The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard interfaces with the system Central
Processing Unit (CPU) and mounts on the NTBK50 PRI card for PRI (but not
ISL) applications. The equivalent circuit resides onboard the NTAK79 2.0 Mb
PRI card. The DTI/PRI digital trunk card is installed in the Media Gateway.
Digital trunk cards are not supported in Media Gateway Expansions.

Install the NTAK79 PRI card

261

The DCHI is responsible for performing the Q.921 layer 2 protocol
information. It transfers layer 3 signaling information between two adjacent
network switches.
The NTAK93 DCH daughterboard, when installed on the NTBK50 circuit
card, is addressed in the same slot as the NTBK50.
A minimum of one NTAK93 is required for each PRI link. If more than one
PRI link connects to the same end location, a single DCHI circuit card can
support up to a maximum of sixteen PRI connections for the system. This
allows for the support of 495 B-Channels or PRI trunks.

NTBK51 Downloadable D-Channel (DDCH) daughterboard
The NTBK51 DDCH daughterboard interfaces with the system Central
Processing Unit (CPU) and mounts on the NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card
for PRI D-Channel applications.
Digital trunk cards are not supported in Media Gateway Expansions.
The DDCH is equivalent to the MSDL card on larger systems, but it only
supports D-channel applications (no SDI or ESDI).
The NTBK51 DDCH daughterboard, when installed on the NTBK50 circuit
card, is addressed in the same slot as the NTBK50.
A minimum of one NTBK51 is required for each PRI link. If more than one
PRI link connects to the same end location, a single DDCH circuit card
can support up to a maximum of 16 PRI connections for the system. This
enables support for 495 B-channels or PRI trunks.

Install the NTAK79 PRI card
The steps required to install PRI are as follows:
Step

Action

Inspect the PRI card.

Set the switches on the PRI card.

Insert the PRI card in slots 1-9 of the Small System main cabinet,
or in slots 11-19, 21-29, 31-39, 41-49 of the first, second, third, and
fourth Expansion cabinets, respectively.

Connect the cables.
—End—

262 2.0 Mb PRI implementation

Each step is described in the pages that follow. The PRI hardware
installation procedure is the same regardless of the type of system at the
far-end that is, another system such as the AXE-10, or SYS-12.

Inspect the NTAK79 circuit card
•

Locate the NTAK79 2.0 Mb circuit card and carefully remove it from its
packaging.

•

Inspect the circuit card for any visible damage that occurred during
shipping.

Set the switches on the NTAK79
The NTAK79 incorporates four onboard dip switches. The tables that follow
provide information on the various settings and related functions of these
switches.
Note: The ON position for all the switches is positioned toward the
bottom of the card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board
adjacent to the bottom left corner of each individual switch.
Figure 83
NTAK79 with switch locations

Install the NTAK79 PRI card

263

Set the switches on the circuit card according to the requirements of your
specific installation:

Switch SW1 - DCHI configuration
This switch enables and disables the onboard DCHI and sets the operating
mode of the DCHI.
For the U.K., use DPNSS1 mode. For all other countries, use Q.931 mode.
Table 92
Switch SW1
Switch

Down (On)

Up (Off)

SW 1-1

enable DCHI

disable DCHI

SW 1-2

DPNSS1/DASS2

Q.931

Switch SW2 - Carrier impedance configuration
This switch sets the carrier impedance to either 1201/2 or 751/2. Twisted pair
cable is usually associated with 1201/2. Coaxial cable is usually associated
with the 751/2 setting.
Table 93
Switch SW2
Cable Type

SW 2-1

SW 2-2

751/2

Up (Off)

Down (On)

120 /2

Down (On)

Up (Off)

Switch SW3 - Clock controller configuration
This switch enables and hardware disables the onboard Clock Controller.
SW 3-2 should be disabled if the onboard clock controller is not in use.
Table 94
Switch SW3
Switch

Down (On)

Up (Off)

Note

SW 3-1

—

Spare

SW 3-2

Disabled

Enabled

Switch SW4 - Carrier shield grounding
This switch allows for the selective grounding of the Tx/Rx pairs of the
carrier cable. Closing the switch (down position) applies Frame Ground
(FGND) to the coaxial carrier cable shield, creating a 751/2 unbalanced
configuration. This applies only to the NTBK05CA cable.

264 2.0 Mb PRI implementation
Table 95
Switch SW4
Switch

Down (On)

Up (Off)

SW 4-1

Rx—FGND

Rx—OPEN

SW 4-2

Tx—FGND

Tx—OPEN

Note: The usual method is to ground the outer conductor of the receive
coax signal.

Insert the NTAK79
Slide the circuit card into card slot 1-9 in the Small System main cabinet, or
in slots 11-19, 21-29, 31-39, 41-49 of the first, second, third, and fourth IP
Expansion cabinets, respectively.
Secure the circuit card in the cabinet by locking the lock latch assemblies.
The card number associated with a 2.0 Mb PRI card is based on the slot in
which the card is installed.
Follow the instructions below to connect cables to the NTAK79 PRI card.
Also refer to Figure 84 "NTAK79 cabling" (page 265).
Procedure 40
Connecting the cables

Step

Action

In the cabling area, located directly below the card cage, remove
the retaining bar that secures the MDF cables. Connect the
NTBK05DA/CA interface cable to the 50-pin Amphenol connector
below the slot in which the NTAK79 is installed. reinstall the retaining
bar to secure the cable(s) in place.

Terminate the NTBK05DA/CA carrier cable as required.
—End—

Install the NTAK79 PRI card
Figure 84
NTAK79 cabling

NTBK05DA pinouts
The pinouts for the NTBK05DA cable are as follows:
Table 96
NTBK05DA pinouts
From:
50-pin MDF
connector

To:
9-pin
connector

color

Signal

pin 23

pin 6

Black

pin 48

pin 7

White

pin 50

pin 9

Bare

R0/T0 FGND

pin 24

pin 2

Black

pin 49

pin 3

Red

pin 25

pin 5

Bare

R1/T1 FGND

NTBK05CA pinouts
The pinouts for the NTBK05CA cable are as follows:
Table 97
NTBK05CA pinouts
From:
50-pin MDF
connector

To:
Transmit coax
connector

To:
Receive coax
connector

To:
50-pin MDF
connector

pin 23

Inner conductor

—

pin 48

outer conductor

—

265

266 2.0 Mb PRI implementation

From:
50-pin MDF
connector

To:
Transmit coax
connector

To:
Receive coax
connector

To:
50-pin MDF
connector

pin 24

—

Inner conductor

—

pin 49

—

outer conductor

—

pin 21

—

pin 49

pin 46

—

pin 48

Install the NTBK50 PRI card
The NTBK50 serves as a motherboard to the NTAK20 clock controller,
and either the NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel handler or the NTAK93
D-channel handler.
The steps required to install PRI are as follows:
Step

Action

Inspect the PRI card and daughterboards.

Set the switches on the PRI card.

Mount the daughterboard(s) on the PRI card.

Insert the PRI card in the Small System main cabinet or Media
Gateway and any IP expansion cabinets.

Connect the cables.
—End—

Each step is described in the pages that follow. The PRI hardware
installation procedure is the same regardless of the type of system at the
far-end.
Procedure 41
Inspecting the NTBK50 circuit card

Step

Action

Locate the NTBK50 2.0 Mb circuit card plus associated
daughterboard(s) and carefully remove them from their packaging.

Inspect the circuit cards for any visible damage that occurred during
shipping.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

Install the NTBK50 PRI card

267

Set the switches on the NTBK50
The NTBK50 incorporates three onboard dip switches. The following tables
provide information on the various settings and related functions of these
switches.
Note: The ON position for all the switches is positioned toward the
bottom of the card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board
adjacent to the bottom left corner of each switch.
Figure 85
NTBK50 with switch locations

Set the switches on the circuit card according to the requirements of your
installation.

Switch SW1 - DCHI configuration (NTAK93 only)
This switch enables and disables the DCHI and sets the operating mode of
the DCHI. It is only used if an NTAK93 D-channel handler daughterboard is
being used. It has no effect when using the NTBK51 DDCH daughterboard.

268 2.0 Mb PRI implementation

For the U.K., use DPNSS1 mode. For all other countries, use Q.931 mode.
Table 98
Switch SW1
Switch

Down (On)

Up (Off)

SW 1-1

—

SW 1-2

DPNSS1/DASS2

Q.931

SW 2-1

75 /4

Down (On)

120 /4

Up (Off)

Switch SW4 - Carrier shield grounding
This switch supports the selective grounding of Tx and Rx pairs of carrier
cable. Closing the switch (down position) applies Frame Ground (FGND) to
the coaxial carrier cable shield, creating a 751/2 unbalanced configuration.
This applies only to the NTBK05CA cable.
Table 100
Switch SW3
Switch

Down (On)

Up (Off)

SW 4-1

Rx—FGND

Rx—OPEN

SW 4-2

Tx—FGND

Tx—OPEN

Note: The usual method is to ground the outer conductor of the receive
coax signal.

Mount the daughterboards on the NTBK50
Use the following procedure to mount and remove the NTAK20 CC and the
NTBK51 DDCH or NTAK93 DCHI daughterboards onto the NTBK50 PRI.
Install the NTAK93 or NTBK51 daughterboard before the NTAK20
daughterboard. Work on a flat surface when mounting or removing
daughterboards.

Install the NTBK50 PRI card

269

Step

Action

Visually inspect the connector pins on the underside of the
daughterboard. Realign any bent pins prior to mounting.

Place the NTBK50 down flat on an antistatic pad.

From an overhead view, with the daughterboard parallel above
the NTBK50 and the connector pins aligned over the connector
sockets, align the mounting holes on the daughterboard with the
tops of the standoffs on the NTBK50 (see Figure 86 "Daughterboard
installation" (page 270)).

Slowly lower the daughterboard toward the NTBK50, keeping the
standoffs in line with all four holes, until the holes rest atop the four
standoffs.
If more than slight pressure is required at this point, the connector
pins might not be aligned with the connector socket. If so, lift the
daughterboard off the NTBK50 and return to step 2.

270 2.0 Mb PRI implementation
Figure 86
Daughterboard installation

Remove the daughterboards from the NTBK50
Use these guidelines to remove the NTAK20 and NTBK51 or NTAK93
from the NTBK50 PRI card. Because of the physical layout of the mother
and daughterboards, the NTAK20 should be removed before the NTAK93
or NTBK51.
1. Starting at the two corners opposite the connector, gently lift each
corner out of the locking groove of the standoff.
2. At the two corners adjacent to the connector, gently lift the entire side
until the mounting holes are clear of the locking groove of the standoff.
3. To remove the connector pins, grasp the edge of the board adjacent to
the connector and lift gently.

Install the NTBK50 PRI card

271

If more than one NTBK50 card is installed, the additional cards may not
carry daughterboards, depending on system configuration. At least one
NTAK20 (per system) is always required.

Insert the NTBK50
Slide the circuit card into card slot 1-9 in the Small System main cabinet,
or in slots 11-19, 21-29, 31-39, 41-49 of the first, second, third, and fourth
IP expansion cabinets, respectively.
Secure the circuit card in the cabinet by locking the lock latch assemblies.
The card number associated with a 2.0 Mb PRI card is based on the slot in
which the card is installed.

Connect the cables
Follow the instructions below to connect cables to the NTBK50 PRI card.
Also refer to Figure 87 "NTBK50 cabling" (page 271).
•

In the cabling area, located directly below the card cage, remove the
retaining bar that secures the MDF cables. Connect the NTBK05DA/CA
interface cable to the 50-pin Amphenol connector below the slot in
which the NTBK50 is installed. reinstall the retaining bar to secure the
cable(s) in place.

•

Terminate the NTBK05DA/CA carrier cable as required.

Figure 87
NTBK50 cabling

NTBK05DA pinouts
The pinouts for the NTBK05DA cable are as follows:

272 2.0 Mb PRI implementation
Table 101
NTBK05DA pinouts
From:
50-pin MDF
connector

To:
9-pin connector

color

Signal

pin 23

pin 6

Black

pin 48

pin 7

White

pin 50

pin 9

Bare

R0/T0 FGND

pin 24

pin 2

Black

pin 49

pin 3

Red

pin 25

pin 5

Bare

R1/T1 FGND

NTBK05CA pinouts
The pinouts for the NTBK05CA cable are as follows:
Table 102
NTBK05CA pinouts
From:
50-pin MDF
connector

To:
Transmit coax
connector

To:
Receive coax
connector

To:
50-pin MDF
connector

pin 23

Inner conductor

—

pin 48

outer conductor

—

pin 24

—

Inner conductor

—

pin 49

—

outer conductor

—

pin 21

—

pin 49

pin 46

—

pin 48

PRI software implementation
The following information describes the process required to program basic
2.0 Mb PRI on the system.
PRI cards must be configured before defining the DCH links or PRI
applications.
Prompts which do not show a response are left as default. For more
information on any of these prompts, refer to Software Input Output
Administration (NN43001-611).

Task summary
Note: Before installing PRI cards in IP expansion cabinets or Media
Gateway systems, configure them for IP connectivity. Refer to LD 117
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

PRI software implementation

273

in the Software Input Output Reference — Maintenance for further
information.
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 17 - Adding a PRI card" (page 273)
2. "LD 17 - Adding a DCHI or DDCH" (page 273)
3. "LD 15 - Defining a PRI customer" (page 275)
4. "LD 16 - Defining a PRI service route" (page 276)
5. "LD 14 - Defining service channels and PRI trunks" (page 277)
6. "LD 73 - Defining system timers and clock controller parameters" (page
277)
7. "LD 73 - Defining PRI parameters and thresholds" (page 278)
8. "LD 73 - Changing trunk pad category values" (page 280)
LD 17 - Adding a PRI card
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

CHG

Change data.

TYPE

CFN

Configuration data block.

CEQU

YES

Changes to common equipment.

PRI2

The PRI2 digital card number, where: xx = 1-9 (Option 11C main
cabinet), 11-19 (IP expansion cabinet 1), 21-29 (IP expansion
cabinet 2), 31-39 (IP expansion cabinet 3), 41-49 (IP expansion
cabinet 4.)
xx = 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 of the first, second, third and
fourth Media Gateway, respectively.

LD 17 - Adding a DCHI or DDCH
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

CHG

Change data.

TYPE

CFN

Configuration data block.

274 2.0 Mb PRI implementation

Prompt

Response

Description

ADAN

NEW DCH xx
CHG DCH xx
OUT DCH xx

Add a primary D-channel (any unused SDI port.)
Change a primary D-channel.
Out the primary D-channel, where:
xx = 1-9 for Option 11C main cabinet, 11-19 for IP expansion
cabinet 1, 21-29 for IP expansion cabinet 2, 31-39 for IP
expansion cabinet 3, and 41-49 for IP expansion cabinet 4.
xx = 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 of the first, second, third and
fourth Media Gateway, respectively.

CTYP

MSDL
TMDI

Card type where:
MSDL = The NTBK51BA Downloadable D-Channel
Daughterboard.
TMDI = TMDI (NTRB21) card.

CDNO

1-50

Card slot number used as the primary DDCH/DCHI.
Card slots 10, 20, 30, 40, and 50 are only applicable for
D-channel configuration of ISL or VNS.

PORT

PORT set to "1".

USR

PRI

D-channel is for ISDN PRI only.

Note: 2.0 Mb only supports PRI or SHA user mode.
IFC

Interface type.

DCHL

PRI card number carries the D-channel. Must match entry made
for the "CDNO" associated with the "DCHI" prompt above.
Where: xx = 1-9 for Option 11C main cabinet, 11-19 for IP
expansion cabinet 1, 21-29 for IP expansion cabinet 2, 31-39 for
IP expansion cabinet 3, and 41-49 for IP expansion cabinet 4.
xx = 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 of the first, second, third and
fourth Media Gateway, respectively.

PRI2

Additional PRI Loops controlled by this DCHI. Remember
one DCHI can control up to 16 PRI loops going to the same
destination. For the system, the maximum limit is eight loops.

OTBF

1-(16)-127

Number of output request buffers. Note: for a single PRI link,
leave this prompt at default (16). Add 5 output request buffers
per additional link.

SIDE

NET (USR)

Prompted only if IFC is set to SL1. NET = network, the
controlling switch USR = slave to the controller

PRI software implementation

275

Prompt

Response

Description

RLS

Software release of far-end. This is the current software release
of the far-end. If the far-end has an incompatible release of
software, it prevents the sending of application messages, for
example, ’Network Ring Again.

RCAP

MSL

MSDL RCAP capability.

OVLR

Allow or disallow overlap receiving on a D-channel. Default is
NO.

LAPD

YES (NO)

Change LAPD parameters. Enter carriage return if timers are
left at default. The following timers are prompted only if LAPD is
set to YES. They are all left at default during initial setup.

- T23

1-(20)-31

Interface guard timer checks how long the interface takes to
respond. In units of 0.5 seconds (default 20 = 10 seconds).

T200

2-(3)-40

Retransmission timer in units of 0.5 seconds (default 3 = 1.5
seconds).

- N200

1-(3)-8

Maximum number of retransmissions.

- N201

4(260)

Maximum number of octets in information field.

-K

1-(7)-32

Maximum number of outstanding unacknowledged frames
(NAKS).

LD 15 - Defining a PRI customer
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ:

NEW
CHG

Add new data.
Change existing data.

TYPE:

NET

Networking data.

CUST

0-99

Customer number
Range for Large System, Call Server 1000E, and
Media Gateway 1000E

0-31

Range for Small System, Media Gateway 1000B

XXXX

Enter the customer’s Listed Directory Number.

LDN
AC2

ISDN

Access Code 2. Enter call types (type of number) that use
access code 2. Multiple responses are permitted. This prompt
only appears on NARS equipped systems. If a call type is not
entered here, it automatically defaults to access code 1.
NPA

E.164 National.

NXX

E.164 Subscriber.

INTL

International.

SPN

Special Number.

LOC

Location Code.

YES

Customer is equipped with ISDN.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

276 2.0 Mb PRI implementation

Prompt

Response

Description

PNI

1-32700

Customer private network identifier. This number is unique to
this customer in the private network. For example, it is used as
part of the setup message for feature operation such as Network
Ring Again and Network ACD. Note that if PNI is set to zero (0),
NRAG and NACD does not work.

HNPA

NPA

Telephone area code for this system. Sent in the setup message
as calling line identification.

HNXX

NXX

Telephone local exchange code for this system. Sent in the
setup message as calling line identification.

HLOC

XXX

Home location code (NARS)

LSC

1-9999

One to four digit Local Steering Code established in the
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP). The LSC prompt is required for
Calling Line ID and Network ACD.

LD 16 - Defining a PRI service route
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

NEW CHG

Add new data.
Change existing data.

TYPE

RDB

Route data block.

TKTP

xxx

Trunk type.

DTRK

YES

Digital trunk route.

DGPT

PRI2

2.0 Mb PRI. Prompted only if PRA = YES in LD15.

ISDN

YES

ISDN option.

MODE

PRI

Route used for PRI only.

PNI

1-32700

Customer private network identifier. Is the same as the CDB
PNI at far-end.

IFC

Interface type.

CHTY

BCH

Signaling type. Prompted if DTRK is YES. D-channel signaling
for B-channels.

CTYP

aaa

Call Type. Enter the call type to associate with the outgoing
route for direct dialing using the trunk access code (instead of
NARS access code).

INAC

YES

Insert Access Code. Permits the NARS AC1 or AC2 access
code to be reinserted automatically on an incoming ESN call.
This prompt only appears on a TIE route and is set to "YES" for
features such as Network ACD to function.

PRI software implementation

Prompt

Response

277

Description
On an existing ESN network, setting this prompt to "YES"
may also require modifying the Digit Manipulation Index (DMI)
associated with this route at the far-end (so the Access Code is
not reinserted twice). The INSERT prompt (INST) is bypassed if
INAC = YES.

LD 14 - Defining service channels and PRI trunks
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

NEW
CHG

Add new data.
Change existing data.
Note: When assigning several members at once use the multiple
create command NEW XX.

TYPE

TIE

TIE trunk only, allowed between MSL-1.

l ch

Loop and channel for digital trunks

0-511 1-4000

Route number and Member number
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.

0-127 1-4000

Range for Meridian 1 Small System, Media Gateway 1000B,

RTMB

...
LD 73 - Defining system timers and clock controller parameters
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

CHG

Change data.

TYPE

PRI2

2.0 Mb PRI.

FEAT

SYTI

System timers.

CCO

Card slot number for Clock Controller 0.

PREF CCO

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock
reference for the main cabinet

SREF CCO

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock
reference for the main cabinet

CC1

Card number for Clock Controller 1.

PREF CC1

Primary Reference DTI/PRI loop for Clock controller one.

SREF CC1

Primary Reference DTI/PRI loop for Clock controller one.

CC2

Card number for Clock Controller 2.

PREF CC2

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the
primary clock reference.

SREF CC2

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the
primary clock reference.

CC3

Card number for Clock Controller 3.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

278 2.0 Mb PRI implementation

Prompt

Response

Description

PREF CC3

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the
primary clock reference.

SREF CC3

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the
primary clock reference.

CC4

Card number for Clock Controller 4.

PREF CC4

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the
primary clock reference.

SREF CC4

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the
primary clock reference.

CCAR

0-(15)

Clock Controller Audit Rate. Enter the time (in minutes) between
normal CC audits.

LD 73 - Defining PRI parameters and thresholds
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

CHG

Change data.

TYPE

PRI2

2.0 Mb PRI.

FEAT

LPTI

Loop timers.

LOOP

X is the slot number of the 2.0 Mb PRI card.

MFF

AFF (CRC)

Alternate mode or CRC multiframe mode.

ALRM

(REG) ALT

Default or alternate alarms selected.

mc mt oc ot

Slip error count.

G10S
SLP

where
mc
mt
oc
ot
BPV

n1 n2

= Maintenance threshold slip count, 1- (5)-255.
= Maintenance threshold time, default 24 hours.
= Out-of-service threshold slip count, 1-(30)-255.
= Out-of-service threshold time, default 1 hour.

Bipolar violation error count. Range is 1-(128)-255 for n1,
1-(122)-255 for n2.

where
n1 is multiplied by 16 to obtain the actual count, giving an
actual count range of 16-4080.

PRI software implementation

279

Prompt

Response

Description

CRC

n1 n2

Cyclic redundancy check error count. Range is 1-(201)-255 for
n1, 1-(97)-255 for n2.

where
n1 is multiplied by 4 to obtain the actual count, giving an
actual count range of 4-1020.
FAP

n1 n2

Frame alignment problem error count. Range is 1-(28)-255 for
n1, (1)-255 for n2.

RATS

1-(10)-15

Number of seconds firmware has to check BPV/CRC/FAP for
excessive error rate.

GP2

T2 mt dt ct ot

Group 2 error thresholds.
This is the maximum amount of time that can elapse before
software checks the associated thresholds of 120 to 32,640
msec and rounds it to the closest multiple of 128 msec.

where
T2
mt
dt
ct
ot

= Error count values are in the range 1-(20)-255.
= Maintenance threshold time (MNT)(default =100S).
= No new data calls threshold time (NNDC)(default =12S).
= No new calls threshold time (NNC)(default =12S).
= Out of service threshold time (OOS)(default =4S).

Note 1: The following requirements must be met for input mt
= >dt = >ct = >ot.
Note 2: Threshold times are one of the following: nnnnT, nnnS,
nnnM, or nnH, where nnnn is and integer and T,S,M, or H show
the increments of use. The values are as follows:
-nnnnT is the time in 20 millisecond increments (nnnn = 20-5000)
- nnnS is the time in 1 second increments (nnn= 1-240)
- nnnM is the time in 1 minute increments (nnn= 1-240)
-nnH is the time in 1 hour increments (nn= 1-24)

MNG1

nnnM

Maintenance Guard time Group 1, default = 15M.

NCG1

nnnM

No New Calls Guard time Group 1, default = 15M.

OSG1

nnnM

Out Of Service Guard time Group 1, default = 15M.

MNG2

nnnS

Maintenance Guard time Group 2, default = 15S.

NCG2

nnnS

No New Calls Guard time Group 2, default = 15S.

OSG2

nnnS

Out Of Service Guard time Group 2, default = 15S.

280 2.0 Mb PRI implementation

Prompt

Response

Description

PERS

ttt

Persistence Timer for Group II problems.
Enter 0-256 msec in increments of 2 msec. Default is 50
(=100ms).

CLRS

ttt

Clearance Timer for Group II problems. Enter 0 - 256 msec in
increments of 2 msec. Default is 50 (=100ms).

OOSC

nnn

Out-of-Service Counter.
Range for nnn of 0-255 with a default of 5.

LD 73 - Changing trunk pad category values
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

CHG

Change data.

TYPE

PRI2

2.0 Mb PRI.

FEAT

PADS

PDCA

PAD table-0 is default and is hard coded.

On-premises extension.

DSET

Meridian Digital set.
Prompted only if the 2.0 Mb Gateway feature is equipped.

OPX

Off-premises extension.

DTT

Digital TIE trunks.

SDTT

Digital Satellite TIE trunks.

NTC

Nontransmission compensated.

TRC

Transmission compensated.

DCO

Digital COT, FEX, WAT, and DID trunks.

VNL

Via Net Loss.

DTO

2.0 Mb PRI2 digital TOLL office trunks.

ACO

Analog CO or WATS trunks.

AFX

Analog FEX trunks.

ADD

Analog DID trunks.

SATT

Analog satellite TIE trunks.

ATO

Analog TOLL office trunks.

PRI2

2.0 Mb PRI trunk.
Prompted only if the 1.5/2.0 Mb Gateway feature is equipped
and TYPE=2.0 Mb PRI.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

PRI software implementation

Prompt

Response

Description

XUT

Analog CO trunk.
Prompted only if the 1.5/2.0 Mb Gateway feature is equipped
and TYPE=PRI2.

XEM

Analog TIE trunk.
Prompted only if the 1.5/2.0 Mb Gateway feature is equipped
and TYPE=PRI2.

281

Table 103 "Pad values" (page 281) shows the pads available to 2.0 Mb PRI.
Positive dB represents loss and negative dB represents gain.
Table 103
Pad values
code

value
(dB)

0.0

+1.0

+2.0

+3.0

+4.0

+5.0

+6.0

+7.0

code

value
(dB)

+8.0

+9.0

+10.0

+11.0

+12.0

+13.0

+14.0

-1

code

value
(dB)

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

code

value
(dB)

-10

idle

+0.6

Configure DPNSS1 with IP expansion cabinets/Media Gateway systems
For Small Systems, when configuring a PRI2 card slot number for DPNSS1,
the response to the DDCS prompt in LD 17 is: 1-9 (Option 11C Cabinet),
11-19 (IP expansion cabinet 1), 21-29 (IP expansion cabinet 2), 31-39 (IP
expansion cabinet 3), 41-49 (IP expansion cabinet 4).

Configure ISDN BRI trunking with IP expansion cabinets/Media Gateway
systems
For Small Systems, when configuring the MISP card slot number for ISDN
BRI trunking in LD 27, the response to the LOOP prompt is: 1-9 (Option
11C Cabinet), 11-19 (IP expansion cabinet 1), 21-29 (IP expansion cabinet
2), 31-39 (IP expansion cabinet 3), 41-49 (IP expansion cabinet 4).
For Small Systems, when configuring the DSL for ISDN BRI trunking in
LD 27, the response to the MISP prompt is: 1-9 (Option 11C Cabinet),
11-19 (IP expansion cabinet 1), 21-29 (IP expansion cabinet 2), 31-39 (IP
expansion cabinet 3), 41-49 (IP expansion cabinet 4).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

282 2.0 Mb PRI implementation

283

2.0 Mb ISL implementation
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
"Overview" (page 283)
"ISL hardware requirements" (page 283)
"ISL hardware installation" (page 286)
"ISL software implementation" (page 288)

Overview
This chapter provides the information required to implement ISL on the
system including:
•

hardware and software installation

•

implementation of components needed to provide basic call service

ISDN features are treated separately in the chapter devoted to ISDN feature
implementation.
This chapter assumes that ESN implementation is already in place. It also
assumes that the reader has a basic understanding of NARS and CDP.
Two modes of ISL are available: shared and dedicated. This chapter covers
ISL installation in dedicated mode using dedicated and leased lines. Shared
mode installations are done according to the instructions supplied for PRI,
with the noted exceptions.

ISL hardware requirements
ISL, regardless of the operation mode, uses analog or digital TIE lines as
B-channels.

284 2.0 Mb ISL implementation

ISL in shared mode
In shared mode, PRI hardware is required in addition to the existing TIE
lines interface cards.
•

NT8D15 Analog trunk card(s)

•

NTAK02 SDI/DCH, NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI, NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI, or
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card(s)

Figure 88
ISL in shared mode

ISL in dedicated mode using leased line
The following hardware is required:
•

NTAK02 SDI/DCH D-channel handler interface

•

A modem capable of the following: (such as Ventel 2400-33 or 2400
Plus II)
— minimum of 2400 baud
— synchronous operation
— must support leased line (also known as private line or point-to-point)
operation

•

NTAK19BA 4-Port SDI Cable

ISL hardware requirements

285

Figure 89
ISL in dedicated mode using leased line

ISL in dedicated mode using dialup modem
The requirements are as follows:
•

NTAK02 SDI/DCH D-channel handler interface.

•

Modems such as the Ventel 2400, Hayes 2400 (the Hayes Smartmodem
2400 cannot be used on leased lines) or Gandalf 2400 that can support
2 or 4-wire leased line operation. 4-wire operation must be specified
when ordering. Otherwise, modems are factory shipped for 2-wire
operation. Modems capable of the following:
— autodial capability
— minimum of 2400 baud
— synchronous operation
— programmable so that one modem originates the call while the other
auto-answers

•

NTAK19BA 4-port SDI cable.

•

NT8D09 500 set line card.

286 2.0 Mb ISL implementation
Figure 90
ISL in dedicated mode using dialup modem

ISL hardware installation
Shared mode
The hardware installation is identical to the PRI installation, with the addition
of analogue or digital TIE trunks (or both).

Dedicated mode
The NTAK02 connects to the modem through the NTAK19BA 4-port cable.
Only ports 1 and 3 are available for use as DCHIs.
Procedure 42
Installing the NTAK02

Step

Action

Set option switches/jumpers on the DCHI card, as shown in Table
104 "NTAK02 switch settings" (page 287) and Table 105 "NTAK02
jumper settings" (page 287), for mode of operation that is, RS232 or
RS422 and DTE or DCE.

Install the NTAK02 in any spare slot 1-9 of the Main Cabinet or slots
11-14 of the Media Gateway.

Install the NTAK19BA four port cable on the 50-pin Amphenol
connector associated with the slot holding the NTAK02.

ISL hardware installation 287
Table 104
NTAK02 switch settings
Port 0

Port 1

SW1-1

SW1-2

SDI

DCH

OFF

SDI

DPNSS1

OFF

—

ESDI

Port 2

Port 3

SW1-3

SW1-4

SDI

DCH

OFF

SDI

DPNSS1

OFF

—

ESDI

Table 105
NTAK02 jumper settings
Unit

Jumper
location

Strap for
DTE

Strap for
DCE

Unit 0

J10

C- B

B - A

Unit 1

J7
J6

C-B
C-B

B - A
B - A

Unit 2

C- B

B - A

Unit 3

J4
J3

C-B
C-B

B - A
B - A

Jumper
location

RS422

RS232

J9
J8

C-B
C-B

B-A
B-A

J2
J1

C-B
C-B

B-A
B-A

—End—

Procedure 43
Setting up the D-channel

Step

Action

If this is a dedicated mode installation using leased line modems,
the D-channel connects the DCHI with the far-end modem over a
dedicated leased line. Synchronous modems with a minimum 2400
baud data rate must be configured. Modems must support leased
line capability and synchronous mode. The Hayes Smartmodem
2400 cannot be used on leased lines.

288 2.0 Mb ISL implementation

If this a dedicated mode using dialup modems, modems such as
Hayes 2400, Ventel 2400 or Gandalf 2400 can be used. In this
configuration, the DCHI connects to a modem which is connected
to a 500 set line card. The call connects to the far-end through the
500 set-to-TIE trunk path.
Program the modem at one end in the autodial mode, so it
automatically initiates a call to the other end at power up. The
autodial number must be coordinated with the far-end switch. The
originating modem has this autodial number stored internally as part
of the modem configuration routine.
The far-end modem need only be setup for auto-answer.
—End—

ISL software implementation
There are two modes of ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) operation, shared mode
and dedicated mode.

Shared mode
The NTAK79 onboard DCHI supports ISDN PRI signaling and ISL trunks.
The configuration is basically the same as the PRI D-channel, with the
D-channel also supporting ISL trunks.
The DTI/PRI software implementation sequence can be used (refer to the
appropriate chapters for more information) with the following exceptions.
LD 17 - Shared mode
Prompt

Response

Description

USR

SHA

D-channel for ISL in "shared" mode, used for both ISDN PRI and ISL.

ISLM

1-240

Number of ISL B-channel (trunks) controlled by the D-channel (no
default value).

LD 16 - Interface type
Prompt

Response

Description

IFC

SL1

Interface type must be SL1 (this is the only type supported for ISL).

MODE

ISLD

TIE route used for ISL members.

LD 14 - Channel identifier
Prompt

Response

Description

CHID

1-240

Channel identifier for ISL channels. Must be coordinated with the
far-end.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

ISL software implementation

289

Dedicated mode
The DCHI uses the NTAK02 circuit card and does not support ISDN PRI
signaling. The DCHI is reserved for ISL use only. The D-channel can
communicate with the far-end by means of a dedicated leased line modem
or dialup modem.
Note that the following implementation relates to analogue TIE trunks being
used as B-channels. In the case where DTI/PRI trunks are also used, then
LD 17 digital loop (2.0 Mb PRI) and LD73 (2.0 Mb PRI/SYTI) must also be
configured with the appropriate clocking and threshold settings.
For ISL dedicated mode using a dialup modem, a 500 set, TIE trunk
route and member must be programmed (used for D-channel). Table 106
"Configuring basic ISL capability" (page 289) summarizes the required
steps.
Table 106
Configuring basic ISL capability
Step

Action

Configure the D-channel for ISL use.

Enable ISDN option.

Enable the ISL option on a per route basis, assign a D-channel
for each route.

Assign a channel identification to each trunk with the ISL
option.

LD 17 - Configure the D-channel for ISL
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

CHG

Change existing data

TYPE

CFN

Configuration data block.

ADAN

NEW DCH 0-79

Add primary D-channel.

CTYP

DCHI

D-channel card type.

CDNO

0-15

Serial Data Interface (SDI) Card number.
Number the SDI cards logically with the
system.

1-9 11-19 21-29,
31-39 41-49
1-50

MSDL application small system Card
number
DCHI small system Card number

PORT

Must be set to 1.

290 2.0 Mb ISL implementation

Prompt

Response

Description

USR

PRI

D-channel for ISDN PRI only.

IFC

SL1

Interface type.

DCHL

1-9

PRI2 card number. (Must match entry for
CDNO).

SIDE

NET (USR)

Net: network, the controlling switch.
User: slave to controller.

RLS

CLOK

Software release of far-end. This is the
current software release of the far-end. If
the far-end has an incompatible release
of software, it prevents the sending of
application messages. For example, for
Network Ring Again.
D-channel clock type for signaling.

EXT

Source of D-channel clock is external to
DCHI card (in this case the DTI/PRI circuit
card). Normally, EXT is used for PRI/ISL.

Note 1: Do not confuse this clock with
the E1 span Clock Controller found on the
NTAK10/79. This clock is in reference to the
DCHI synchronous mode of operation.
Note 2: If directly connecting two DCHI ports
with out the use of modems, set "CLOK" to
"EXT" on one side and "INT" on the other.

LAPD

YES,(NO)

Change LAPD parameters. Simply carriage
return if timers are to be left at default value.
The following timers are prompted only if
LAPD is set to YES. The following can all be
left at default during initial setup.

T23

1-(20)-31

Interface guard timer checks how long the
interface takes to respond. In units of 0.5
seconds (default 20 = 10 seconds).

T200

2-(3)-40

Retransmission timer in units of 0.5 seconds
(default 3 = 1.5 seconds).

N200

1-(3)-8

Maximum number of retransmissions.

ISL software implementation

291

Prompt

Response

Description

N201

4(260)

Maximum number of octets in information
field.

1-(7)-32

Maximum number of outstanding
unacknowledged frames (NAKS).

LD 15 - Enable the ISDN option
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ:

NEW
CHG

Add new data.
Change existing data.

TYPE:

NET

Networking data.

CUST

0-99
Customer number
Range for Large System, Call Server 1000E, and Media
Gateway
1000E
0-31

Range for Small System, Media Gateway 1000B,

ISDN

YES

Customer is equipped with ISDN.

PNI

1-32700

Customer private network identifier. MUST be unique to
this customer in the private network. Used as part of the
setup message for feature operation such as Network Ring
Again and Network ACD.

HNPA

NPA

Telephone area code for this system. Sent as part of setup
message as CLID.

HNXX

NXX

Telephone local exchange code for this system. Sent as
part of setup message for calling line identification.

HLOC

XXX

Home location code (NARS).

LSC

1-9999

One to four digit Local Steering Code established in the
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP). The LSC prompt is
required for Calling Line ID and Network ACD.

AC2

Access Code 2. Enter call types (type of number) that use
access code 2. Multiple responses are permitted. This
prompt only appears on NARS equipped systems. If a call
type is not entered here, it is automatically defaulted to
access code 1.
NPA

E.164 National.

NXX

E.164 Subscriber.

INTL

International.

SPN

Special Number.

LOC

Location Code.

292 2.0 Mb ISL implementation
LD 16 - Enable the ISL option
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

NEW CHG

Add new data.
Change existing data.

TYPE

RDB

Route data block.

CUST

Customer number, as defined in LD 15

0-511

Route number
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.

ROUT
0-127

Range for Meridian 1 Small System, Media Gateway
1000B.

TKTP

TIE

TIE trunk route.

DTRK

YES
NO

Enter YES if this is a Digital Trunk Interface (DTI or PRI).

ISDN

YES

ISDN option.

MODE

ISLD

Route for ISL application.

DCHI

DCHI port number in CFN to carry the D-channel for this
TIE trunk route.

PNI

1-32700

Customer private network identifier. Must be the same as
the CDB PNI at the fa- end.

IFC

Interface type.
SLl

System to system.

CTYP

aaa

Call Type. Enter the call type to be associated with the
outgoing route for direct dialing using the trunk access
code (instead of NARS access code).

INAC

YES

Insert Access Code. Permits the NARS AC1 or AC2
access code to be reinserted automatically on an incoming
ESN call.

LD 14 - Assign a channel identifier
Prompt

Response

Description

REQ

NEW
CHG

Add new data.
Change existing data.

TYPE

TIE

TIE trunk type.

lscu

Terminal Number
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.

Format for Meridian 1 Small System, Media Gateway 1000B
where c = card and u = unit.

RTMB
0-511 1-4000

Route number and Member number
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.

ISL software implementation

Prompt

CHID

Response

Description

0-127 1-4000

Range for Meridian 1 Small System, Media Gateway 1000B.

1-240

Channel identifier for ISL channels (remove with Xnn). Must be
coordinated with far-end (no default value).

293

294 2.0 Mb ISL implementation

295

Nonstandard cables
Contents
The section contains information on the following topics:
"Introduction" (page 296)
"NT5K40AA, NT5K41AA, NT5K86AA" (page 296)
"NT8D7206, NT8D7207" (page 296)
"QCAD128" (page 297)
"QCAD129" (page 298)
"QCAD133" (page 298)
"NT8D7205" (page 299)
"QCAD328" (page 300)
"NT8D74 Clock Controller to InterGroup cable" (page 301)
"NT8D75 Clock Controller to Clock Controller cable" (page 301)
"NT8D79 PRI/DTI to Clock Controller cable" (page 301)
"NT8D83 PRI/DTI to I/O cable" (page 301)
"NT8D85 Network to IPE cable" (page 302)
"NT8D86 Network to I/O cable" (page 302)
"NT8D97AX PRI/DTI I/O to MDF cable" (page 302)
"NT9J93AD PRI/DTI Echo Canceller to I/O cable" (page 303)
"NTND26 PRI to MSDL cables" (page 303)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

296 Nonstandard cables

"NTND27 MSDL to I/O panel cables" (page 303)
"NTND98 PRI to I/O panel cables" (page 303)

Introduction
This section provides information required to build systems cables of
nonstandard lengths for ISDN PRI applications.

NT5K40AA, NT5K41AA, NT5K86AA
These cables are used to transport the 2Mb digital signal from the faceplate
connector on the PRI card to the Line Terminating Equipment interface.
•

Standard lengths:
— NT5K40AA - 4 m (13 ft.)
— NT5K41AA - 8 m (26 ft.)
— NT5K86AA - 12m (39 ft.)

•

Construction - 75 ohm dual co-axial type with solid inner conductor and
braided shield.

•

J1 Connector - 15-pin, male, subminiature D with jackscrews

•

J2 Connector - 75 ohm BNC crimp plug

•

J3 Connector - 75 ohm BNC crimp plug

Table 107
NT5K40AA, NT5K41AA, NT5K86AA wire list
From
(pack end)

To
(I/O end)

Signal

J1-1

J2 Inner Conductor

XTIP (transmit)

J1-9

J2 Shield

XRING (transmit)

J1-3

J3 Inner Conductor

RTIP (receive)

J1-11

J3 Shield

RRING (receive)

J1-9

J3 Shield

FRAME GROUND

NT8D7206, NT8D7207
This cable is used to transport the 2Mb/s digital signal from the PRI pack to
the I/O assembly located at the cabinet bulkhead.
•

Standard length 3.05 m (10 ft.) for Half Group systems and Single group systems

•

Construction - 24 AWG, stranded foil-shielded twisted pairs

•

P1 Connector (Pack end) - 9-pin, male, subminiature D, with jackscrews
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007

QCAD128

•

297

P2 Connector (I/O Panel end) - 9-pin, male, subminiature D, with
jackscrews

Table 108
NT8D7206, NT8D7207 wire list
Color

From
(pack end)

To
(I/O end)

Signal

White

P1-1

P2-6

XTIP (transmit)

Black

P1-9

P2-7

XRING (transmit)

Green Shield

P2-CASE P2-9

GROUND

Red

P1-3

P2-2

RTIP (receive)

Black

P1-11

P2-3

RRING (receive)

Red Shield

P2-CASE P2-5

GROUND

QCAD128
This cable transports the T1 signal from the PRI pack to the I/O panel.
•

Standard length - 10 ft. (3.05 m)

•

Construction - 15-conductor ribbon, 28 AWG (0.321 mm), stranded

•

P1 Connector - 15-pin, male, subminiature D, with jackscrews

•

P2 Connector - 15-pin, male, subminiature D, with jackscrews

See Table Table 109 "QCAD128 wire list" (page 297).
Table 109
QCAD128 wire list
From

Signal

P1-1

P2-1

XTIP (transmit tip) to telephone company

P1-2

P2-2

GND (ground)

P1-3

P2-3

RTIP (receive tip) from telephone
company

P1-4

P2-4

GND (ground)

P1-5

P2-5

P1-6

P2-6

P1-7

P2-7

P1-8

P2-8

P1-9

P2-9

P1-10

P2-10

XRING (transmit ring) to telephone
company

298 Nonstandard cables

From

Signal

P1-11

P2-11

RRING (receive ring) from telephone
company

P1-12

P2-12

P1-13

P2-13

P1-14

P2-14

P1-15

P2-15

QCAD129
This cable is used to connect the RS-232-C interface between an echo
canceller and the PRI pack.
•

Standard length - 2.1 m (7 ft.)

•

Construction - 22 AWG (0.644 mm), stranded

•

P1 Connector - 15-pin, male, subminiature D, with jackscrews

•

P2 connector - 25-pin, male, subminiature D, with jackscrews

Table 110
QCAD129 wire list

PRI Signal

From

Echo
Canceller
Signal

DCD

P1-1

P2-20

DTR

RXD

P1-2

P2-2

TXD

DTR

P1-4

P2-8

DCD

TXD

P1-5

P2-3

RXD

GND

P1-10

P2-7

GND

RTS

P1-12

P2-4

CTS

P1-9

P2-5

TPENB
(Test Port
Enable Bar)

P1-15

QCAD133
For cabinets with an I/O filter assembly, this cable transports the T1 signal
from the I/O filter to the Network Channel Terminating Equipment (NCTE)
telephone company interface. See Table Table 111 "QCAD133 wire list"
(page 299).

NT8D7205

299

For cabinets without an I/O filter assembly, this cable transports the
T1 signal from the QPC720 PRI pack to the NCTE telephone company
interface.
•

Standard length - 50 ft (15.3 m)

•

Construction - Individually foil-shielded, twisted pairs, 24 AWG (0.511
mm), stranded

•

P1 Connector - 15-pin, female, subminiature D with jackscrews

•

P2 Connector - 15-pin, male, subminiature D, with slide-latch (optional
spring-latch loose-packed with cable assembly)

Table 111
QCAD133 wire list
Color

From

PRI signal

WHITE

P1-1

P2-1

XTIP (transmit tip) to
telephone company

BLACK

P1-9

P2-9

XRING (transmit ring) to
telephone company

GRN SHLD

P1-2

GND (ground)

RED

P1-3

P2-3

RTIP (receive tip) from
telephone company

BLACK

P1-11

P2-11

RRING (receive ring) from
telephone company

RED SHLD

P1-4

GND (ground)

NT8D7205
This cable is used to transport the 2Mb digital signal from the I/O panel
at the cabinet bulkhead to the Network Channel Terminating Equipment
(NCTE) telephone company interface.
•

Standard length - 15.3 m (50 ft.)

•

Construction - Individually foil-shielded, twisted pairs, 24 AWG (0.511
mm), stranded

•

P1 Connector - 9-pin, female, subminiature D with jackscrews

•

P2 Connector - 9-pin, male, subminiature D, with jack screws

Table 112
NT8D7205 wire list
Color

From
(pack end)

To
(I/O end)

Signal

White

P1-6

P2-6

XTIP (transmit)

300 Nonstandard cables

Color

From
(pack end)

To
(I/O end)

Signal

Black

P1-7

P2-7

XRING (transmit)

Green Shield

P1-9

GROUND

Red

P1-2

P2-2

RTIP (receive)

Black

P1-3

P2-3

RRING (receive)

Red Shield

P1-5

GROUND

QCAD328
This cable is used to connect the PRI pack to the D-channel interface card,
either the QPC757 or NT6D11AB DCHI. There are two types of QCAD328
cables: QCAD328A and QCAD328B.
•

QCAD328A - 1.8 m (6 ft)

•

QCAD328B - 5.5 m (18 ft)

•

QCAD328C - 10.67 m (35 ft)

•

QCAD328D - 15.24 m (50 ft)

•

Construction - 24 AWG (0.511 mm), stranded

•

P1 Connector - 25-pin male, subminiature D

•

P2 Connector - 15-pin male, subminiature D

Table 113
QCAD328 wire list
From

Signal

P1-2

P2-2

SDA+

P1-13

P2-10

SDB-

P1-20

P2-15

P1-15

P2-9

STA+

P1-14

P2-11

STB-

P1-3

P2-4

RDA+

P1-16

P2-12

RDB-

P1-17

P2-5

RTA+

P1-12

P2-13

RTB-

P1-8

P2-8

P1-5

P1-8

P1-7

P1-1

P2-1

GND

NT8D83 PRI/DTI to I/O cable

301

NT8D74 Clock Controller to InterGroup cable
This cable connects the QPC471 Clock Controller card to the NT8D36
InterGroup Module.
This cable is available in the following lengths:
•

NT8D74AC

1.2 m (4 ft)

•

NT8D74AD

1.8 m (6 ft)

•

NT8D74AE

2.4 m (8 ft)

•

NT8D74AF (QCAD110B)

3 m (10 ft)

•

NT8D74AJ

4.8 m (16 ft)

NT8D75 Clock Controller to Clock Controller cable
This cable interconnects QPC471 Clock Controller cards.
This cable is available in the following lengths:
•

NT8D75AC

1.2 m (4 ft)

•

NT8D75AD

1.8 m (6 ft)

•

QCAD125

3 m (10 ft)

NT8D79 PRI/DTI to Clock Controller cable
This cable connects the PRI/DTI card to the QPC471 Clock Controller card.
This cable is available in the following lengths:
•

NT8D79AB

0.6 m (2 ft)

•

NT8D79AC

1.2 m (4 ft)

•

NT8D79AD

1.8 m (6 ft)

•

NT8D79AE

2.4 m (8 ft)

•

NT8D79AF
(QCAD130)

3 m (10 ft)

NT8D83 PRI/DTI to I/O cable
This cable connects the PRI/DTI card (T1 port) to the I/O connector panel.
This cable is available in the following lengths:
• NT8D83AC

1.2 m (4 ft)

• NT8D83AD

1.8 m (6 ft)

302 Nonstandard cables

NT8D85 Network to IPE cable
This cable connects the following:
•

QPC581 CMA card to QPC581 CMA card in dual CPU configuration

•

QPC414 Network card to PRI/DTI card

•

QPC414 Network card to QPC659 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer card
(for internal cabling only)

•

QPC659 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer card to QPC659 Dual Loop
Peripheral Buffer card when connecting two NT8D13 IPE Modules
together

This cable is available in the following lengths:
• NT8D85AB

0.6 m (2 ft)

• NT8D85AC

1.2 m (4 ft)

• NT8D85AZ

1.5 m (5 ft)

• NT8D85AD

1.8 m (6 ft)

• NT8D85AE

2.4 m (8 ft)

• NT8D85AF

3 m (10 ft)

• NT8D85AJ

4.8 m (16 ft)

• NT8D85AL

6 m (20 ft)

• NT8D85AP

7.6 m (25 ft)

• NT8D85AV

13.7 m (45 ft)

NT8D86 Network to I/O cable
This cable connects the following to the I/O connector panel:
•

QPC414 Network card

•

PRI/DTI card

•

QPC659 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer card

•

NT8D47 RPE

This cable is available in the following lengths:
• NT8D86AC

1.5 m (5 ft)

• NT8D86AD

1.8 m (6 ft)

NT8D97AX PRI/DTI I/O to MDF cable
This cable connects the PRI/DTI card to the MDF through the I/O connector
panel. It is 15.2 m (50 ft) long.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.

NTND98 PRI to I/O panel cables

303

NT9J93AD PRI/DTI Echo Canceller to I/O cable
This cable connects the PRI/DTI Echo Canceller port to the I/O connector
panel. It is 1.8 m (6 ft) long.

NTND26 PRI to MSDL cables
These cables connect the MSDL card to the PRI cards.
• NTND26AA

6 feet

• NTND26AB

18 feet

• NTND26AC

35 feet

• NTND26AD

50 feet

NTND27 MSDL to I/O panel cables
These cables connect the MSDL card to the I/O panel.
• NTND27

6 ft

NTND98 PRI to I/O panel cables
These cables connect the PRI card to the I/O panel.
• NTND98

6 ft

304 Nonstandard cables

Nortel Communication Server 1000

ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
All Rights Reserved.
Publication: NN43001-301
Document status: Standard
Document version: 02.03
Document date: 7 December 2007
To provide feedback or to report a problem with this document, go to www.nortel.com/documentfeedback.
Sourced in Canada
LEGAL NOTICE
While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed to in writing
NORTEL PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject to change without notice.
Nortel, the Nortel Logo, the Globemark, SL-1, Meridian1, and Succession are trademarks of Nortel Networks.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 2007:12:03 03:30:06-05:00
Author                          : Nortel
Modify Date                     : 2008:01:29 07:21:25
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-702
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller Server 6.0.1 (Sparc Solaris, Built: 2003-11-03)
Creator Tool                    : Pubps,       Arbortext, Inc.
Metadata Date                   : 2007:12:04 14:08:08-04:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
Creator                         : Nortel
Document ID                     : uuid:a9bc7af5-943e-4b5b-8904-75512d46201b
Instance ID                     : uuid:3853f30e-a16a-420f-adfb-69d1c9972270
Page Count                      : 306

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Nortel Networks Nn43001 301 Users Manual ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation And Commissioning

NN43001-301 to the manual 8f6f8d6a-530b-44dd-8d87-38c31988129f

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation